Owner`s Manual - Chevrolet Owner Center

4
S-IO P I C K - U P O W N E R ' S M A N U A L
1
1
I
INTRODUCTION
1994 Chevrolet S-IO Pickup Owner's Manual
Welcome
This manual was prepared to acquaint you with the operation and
maintenance of your 1994 Chevrolet S-10 Pickup and to provide important
safety information. Thereis also a Chevrolet Truck Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information booklet.In some vehicles, there can
be information
manuals from other manufacturerslike body builders or special equipment
companies. We urge you to reviewall these publications carefully. This will
help you enjoysafe and trouble-free operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service,keep in mind that your Chevrolet dealer knows
your vehicle best and is interested
in your complete satisfaction.Your dealer
invites you to return
for all of your service needs both during and after the
warranty period.
Remember, if you have a concern and need help handling
it to your
satisfaction, see the procedure in the Chevrolet Truck Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information booklet.
Thanks for choosing a Chevrolet product.
We value you as a member of the
Chevrolet family.We want toassure youof our continuing interestin your
pleasure and satisfaction with your vehicle.
Chevrolet Motor Division
30007 Van Dyke Ave.
General Motors Corporation
Warren, Michigan
'Copyright 1993 General Motors Corporation, Chevrolet Motor Division.
All Rights Reserved
Second Edition
Printed inU.S.A.
i
Important Notesto Owners and Drivers
....About This Manual:
Please keep this manual in your vehicle itsowill be thereif you ever need it
when you’re on the road.If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in
it so the new owner canuse it.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We
reserve the right to make changesthe
in product after that time without
further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefera French Language
Manual:
Aux proprietaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire
de
ce guide en francais chez votre concessionaire ou DGN
au Marketing
Services Ltd., 1500 BonhillRd., Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7.
.. .
General Motors, GM and the
GM Emblem, Chevrolet and the Chevrolet
Emblem, and S-10 are registered trademarksof General Motors
Corporation.
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
REGULAR CAB
CLUB COUPE/ EXTENDED CAB
Table of Contents
Introduction - How to Use this Manual
This section tells you how to use your manual and includes safety
and vehicle damage warnings and symbols.
Section 1 - Seats and Safety Restraints
This section tells youhow to use your seats and safety restraints
properly.
Section 2
- Features & Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Section 3 - Comfort Controls& Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort
controls and how to operate your audio system.
Section 4 - Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and
how to drive under different conditions.
Section 5
- Problems on the Road
This section tells you what to doyou
if have a problem while
driving, such as a flat tireor engine overheating.
Section 6 - Service & Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running
properly and looking good.
Section 7-
Scheduled Maintenance Services
This section tellsyou when to perform vehicle maintenance and
what fluids and lubricants to use.
Section 8 - Customer Assistance Information
This section tellsyou how to contact yourGM division for
assistance and howto get service publications. It also gives you
information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
8-4.
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subjectin this
manual. You can useit to quickly find something you want
to read.
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning end
to when they
first receive theirnew vehicle. This will help you learn about the features
and controlsfor your vehicle.In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and
words work together to explain things quickly.
INDEX: A good place to lookfor what you need is the Index in back
of the
manual. It’s an alphabeticallist of all that’s in the manual, and the page
number where you’ll findit.
SECTIONS 1-6: Each sectionof this manual begins with a brief
list of its
contents, so you can often find at a glance if a section contains the
information you want.
SECTION 7:This section of the manual coversthe maintenance required
for your vehicle.
SECTION 8 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE: This section includes
important information about reporting safety defects and gives
you details
about the “Roadside Assistance” program.
You will also find customer
satisfaction phone numbers (including customer satisfaction numbers for the
hearing and speech impaired) as well the
as mediatiodarbitration procedure.
We’ve also included ordering informationfor service publicationsin this
section.
V
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a numberof safety cautions in this book.
We use a box with
gray background and the word
CAUTION to tell you about things that could
hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
In the gray caution area,we tell you whatthe hazard is. Thenwe tell you
what to do to help avoidor reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If
you don’t, youor others could be hurt.
You w
ill also find a circle witha slash through it in this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,” “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let this happen.”
‘I
vi
.. .
Vehicle Damage Warnings
in this book3uwi:
ind these notices:
I NOTICE:
I
These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.
In the notice area,we tell you about something that can damage your
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your warranty,
and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell you^ what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE
warnings in different colors or in different words.
You’ll alsosee warning labels on your vehicle. They use yellow for
cautions, bluefor notices and the words CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
These are someof the symbols you will find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols are used on
an original battery:
Cautran
Possible Injury
Protect Eyes
by Shielding
Caustic Battery Acid
Sould Cause Burns
Avoid Sparks
or Flames
vii
Spark or Flame Could
Explode Battery
I
These symbols are important for you and
your passengers whenever vour
vehicle is driven:
2
U
Fasten
Safety
Door LocwUnlock
Belts
These symbols have todo with your lights:
Master Lighting
Switch
A
**.*:o
Turn Signal
Direction
Hazard Warning
Flasher
.e.
I
Parking Lights
\
Fog Lights
Daytime
Running Lights
viii.
Headlight
High Beam
These symbolsare on some of your controls:
0
Windshield
Washer
Windshield
Defroster
Windshield
Wiper
Off
I
Ventilating Fan
These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:
Battery Charging
System
Engine Coolant
Temperature
BRAKE
Brake
I
SHIFT
Fuel
Engine Oil
Pressure
I
Shift Light
n
;are s
ler symbols you may see:
t
m
Fuse
Hood Release
Lighter
Horn
Seats & Restraint Systems
Section
Here you'll find information about the seats
in your vehicle and how to use
your safety belts properly
. You can also learn about some things
you should
not do with safety belts.
Seats and Seat Controls ......................................
1-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Safety Belts: They're for Everyone .............................
1-7
Why Safety Belts Work ...................................
1-8
Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-12
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-19
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..........................
Right Front Passenger Position .............................
1-19
Center Passenger Position.................................
1-20
1-20
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat Passenger Positions .............................
1-21
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
ChildRestraints ........................................
1-25
LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Checking Your Restraint Systems .............................
1-33
Replacing Safety Belts After a Crash ..........................
1-33
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the
seats-how
and down.
to adjust them, and fold them up
Front Seat (Except Easy Entry)
Move the lever under
the front of the seatto
your left to unlockit.
Slide the seatto where
you want it. Then
release the lever and
try to move the seat
with your bodyto
make sure the seatis
locked into place.
Front Seat (Easy Entry Only)
Move the lever under
the frontof the seat up
to unlock it. Slide the
seat to where you
want it. Then release
the lever and try to
move the seat with
your body to make
sure the seatis locked
into place.
1-2
I
Reclining Front Seatbacks
(Bucket Seats or60/40 Bench)
To adjust the seatback,
lift the lever on the
outer sideof the seat.
Release the leverto
lock the seatback
where you want it.
Pull up onthe lever
and the seat will go to
an upright position.
But don't havea seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.
1-3
Front Seatback Latches
The front seatback folds forward to let people get into the back seat or reach
the storage area behind the seat.
Your seatback will move back and forth
freely, unless you come to
a sudden stop. Thenit will lockin place.
There’s one time the seatback may not fold without some help from you.
That’s if your vehicle is parked going down a fairly steep hill.
To fold a front
seatback forward,
push the seatback
toward the rear as you
lift this latch. Then the
seatback willfold
forward. The latch
must be downfor the
seat to work properly.
1-4
Easy Entry Seat (ExtendedCab)
The right front bucket or split-bench seat of your vehicle makesit easy to
get in and outof the rear vehicle area.
When you tilt the rightfront seatback fullyforward, the whole seat will
slide forward.
0
After someone gets into the rear seat area, move the right
front
seatback to its original position. Then move the seat rearward until it
locks.
To get out, again tiltthe seatback fully forward.
1-5
Jump Seat (Extended Cab Models)
STORED POSITION
FOLDED-DOWN POSITION
Your extended cab pickup hasjump seats in the rear area.
To fold thejump
seat down, pull down on the handle on the bottom
of the seat until the seat is
in place, then move the seatback to a vertical position.
To store the seat, fold
the seatback down onthe cushion, then push the entire seat up until
it is
flush with the trim panels.
Don’t let the safety belts
be damaged by the hinges or the latches. Safety
belts should be folded and stored between the seat cushion and seatback.
Head Restraints
The head restraints in
this vehicle are not
adjustable.
1-6
Safety Belts: They’reFor Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how
to use safety belts properly.It also
tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.
I,
This figure lights up as a reminder
to bucklk up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder
Light” inthe Index.)
In many states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts.
Here’s why: They work.
You never knowif you’ll be in a crash.If you do have a crash, you don’t
know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes cansobeserious that even
buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes arein between. In
many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away.
Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In
most crashes buckling up does matter
... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride inor on anything, yougo as fast as it goes.
For example, if the
bike is going 10 mph
(16 km/h), so is the
child.
When the bike hitsthe
block9it stops. But the
child keeps going!
Put someone on it.
1-9
I
. .
Get it up to speed.
Then stop the
“vehicle.” The rider
The person keeps
going until stoppedby
something.
In a real vehicle,it
could be the
windshield ...
01me
safety belts!
as the vehicle does. IOU get more time to
With safety belts, you slow down
stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take forces.
the
That’s why safety belts make such good sense.
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts- and the Answers
Qt Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident I’m wearing a
safety belt?
A:
You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you
can easily unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down.And
your chanceof being conscious during and after an accident,
so you
can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.
Q : Why don ’t they just
putin air bags so people won’t have to wear
safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in some vehicles today and will be in more
of them in the
- so they work with
future. But they are supplemental systems only
safety belts, not insteadof them. Every airbag system ever offeredfor
sale has requiredthe use of safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, youstill have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially
in side and
other collisions.
1-11
0:If I’m a good drive4and I never drivefarfium home, why should I
wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, butif you’re inan accident -even
one thatisn’t your fault- you and your passengers can be hurt. Being
a good driver doesn’t protect you
from things beyond your control,
such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km)of home. And the
greatest numberof serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turnedto “Run” or “Start,”a light will come on for about
eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts. Unless the
driver’s safety belt is already buckled,
a tone will also sound.
How To Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This sectionis only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and
children. And there are different rulesfor smaller children and babies. If
a
child will be ridingin your vehicle, see the section after this one, called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
rlrsz, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-12
I
Driver Position
This section describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s
how to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (tosee how, see “Seats”in the Index) soyou can situp
straight.
I
1-13
3. Pick up the latch
plate and pullthe
belt across you.
Don’t let itget
twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the beltisn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the ofend
this section.
Make sure the release button
on the buckleis positioned so you would
if you ever had to.
be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
5. To make the lap
part tight,pull
down onthe
buckle endof the
belt as you pull
up on the
shoulder belt.
1-14
The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips,just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you’d beless likely to slide under the
lap belt. If you slid underit, the
belt would applyforce at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These partsof the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety beltlocks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
1
At
I
I
1
8
The shoulder beltis too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection
this way.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
f
Q: What's wrong with this?
I
A:
1
I
I
I
I
1
8
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the
shoulder at all times.
Q: What's wrong with this?
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
To unlatch the belt,
just push the buttonon
the buckle. The belt
should go back out of
the way.
'
Before you close the door, be surethe belt is out of the way. If you slam the
door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.
1-18
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant women.
Like all
occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured
if they don’t wear
safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and lap
the portion
should be wornas low as possible throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protectthe fetus is to protectthe mother. When a safety belt
is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be in
hurt
a crash. For
pregnant women,as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effectiveis
wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works
the same way asthe driver’s
safety belt.See “Driver Position,” earlierin this part.
When the shoulder beltis pulled out all the way,it will lock. If it does, let it
go back allthe way and start again.
1- 19
1
Center Passenger Position (BenchSeat)
A . ,
,i
'
4
i
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone sit
can
in the center position.
When you sit in a
center seating
position, you have a
lap safety belt, which
has no retractor.To
make the belt longer,
tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.
1-20
To make the belt
shorter, pull its free
end as shown until the
belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release
it the same wayas the lap part of a
lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender”
at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be
able to unbucklethe safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
(Extended Cab Jump Seats)
Lap Belt
These are reserve seating positions equipped with lap belts only.
It’s very importantfor rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics
show that unbelted people inthe rear seat are hurt more often in crashes
than those who are wearing safety belts.
1-21
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrownofout
the vehiclein
a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
Each jump seat has a
lap belt with no
retractor. To make the
belt longer, tilt the
latch plate little
a
and
pull the belt.
To make it shorter,
pull the belt as shown
until it is snug.
Buckle, position and releaseit the same wayas the lap part of the driver’s
safety belt (see “Driver Position” in the Index). Make sure the release button
on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
Don’t use child restraints on these seats. They won’t work properly.
1-22
Children
Everyone ina vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all
children smaller than adult size.
In fact, the law in everystate in the United
States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained whilein a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
1-23
1-24
Child Restraints
Be sure to followthe instructions for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or
in a booklet, or both. These restraints
use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance
of personal injury. The
instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how
to do that.
The child restraint must be secured properly
in the center (except60/40
bench seat) or rightfront passenger seat. If you have a60/40 split bench
seat, you must use the right
front passenger seat.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sureto properly
secure any child restraintin your vehicle - even when nQ.child is in it.
Top Strap
If your child restraint
has a top strap,it
should be anchored.
If you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your vehicle dealer to
put it in for you. If you wantto install an anchor yourself, your dealer can
tell you how to doit.
I
1-25
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat
Position (Bench Seat Except 60/40 Bench Seat)
-
Don’t use child restraints in the center position
of a 60140 bench seat.
When you securea child restraint in a center seating position, you’ll be
using thelap belt.
See the earlier section aboutthe top strap if the child restrainthas one.
1. Make the belt as
long as possible
by tilting the
latch plate and
pulling it along
the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child
restraint.
3. Secure the child inthe child restraintas the instructionssay.
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint.
The child
restraint instructions will show you
how.
5. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release buttonis
positioned so you
would be ableto
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pullits free end while you push down on the child
restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sureisit
secure. If the child restraint isn’t secure, turn
the latch plate over and
buckle it again. Thensee if it is secure.If it isn’t, secure the restraint in
a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraint maker
for
their advice about how to attach the child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will
be ready to workfor an adultor larger child passenger.
Jump Seats (ExtendedCab)
Don’t use child restraints in these positions. The restraints won’t work
properly.
1-27
60/40 Split Bench Seats
8
Don’t use a child restraint in this position.
The restraint won’t work
properly.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier section about
the top
strap ifthe child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child
restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint
as the instructions say.
the lap and shoulder portionsof the
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
1-28
1
f
If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’sface or neck, putit
behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release buttonis
positioned so you
would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
5 . Pull therest of
the shoulder belt
all the way outof
the retractor to
set the lock.
6. To tighten the
belt, feed the
shoulder belt
back into the
retractor while
you push down
on the child
restraint.
1-29
7 . Push and pull the
child restraint in
different
directions to be
sure it issecure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and
let
it go back allthe way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready tofor
work
an adult or
larger child passenger.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s
safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next
to a window so the child can
wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide.
Children who aren’t buckled
up can be thrown out in
a crash.
1-30
0
Children who aren't buckled up can strike other people
who are.
1-31
Q: What if a childis wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the childsois
small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center
of the vehicle, but be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,so that in a crash the
If the
child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide.
child is so small that the shoulder belt
is still very close to the child’s
in a seat that hasa lap
face or neck, you might want to place the child
belt, if your vehicle has one.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn
low and
snug on the hips,just touching the child’s thighs.This applies beltforce to
the child’s pelvic bonesin a crash.
1-32
f
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt willfasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to
fasten, your dealer will order you an
extender. It’s free. When you go into order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be long enough
for you. The extender will be
just for you, andjust for the seatin your vehicle that you choose. Don’t
let
someone else use it, and useit only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure all your belts, buckles,latch plates, retractors,
anchorages and reminder systems
are working properly. Look for any loose
parts or damage.If you see anything that might keep a restraint system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Replacing Safety Belts After a Crash
If you’ve had acrash, do you need new belts?
After avery minor collision, nothing may
be necessary. But if the belts were
stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you
need new belts.
If you ever see a label on the
driver’s safety belt that says to replace the belt,
be sure todo so. Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in an
accident. You would see this label on the belt near the door opening.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage may
also mean
you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New
parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the
time of the collision.
1- 33
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A:
The belt is torn.
Torn or frayed belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces.If a belt is tornor frayed, get anew one right away.
Before replacing any safety belt, see your dealer for the correct part number.
You’ll need the model year and model number for your vehicle. The model
year is on your title and registration. And you
can find the model number on
the CertificatiodTire label of your vehicle. See“CertificatiodTire Label” in
the Index.
The model number on the replacement belt must be listed on the safety belt
you want to replace.
Pull shoulder belt all the way to
outsee this label.
Features & Controls
.
Section
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional featuresyour
on
vehicle. and information on starting. shifting. and braking
. Also explained
are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tellifyou
everything
is working properly- and what to do if you have a problem
.
For explanation of vehicle symbols. refer to “Vehicle Symbols” in the
Introduction
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
.
Your Doors and How They Work
..............................
2-5
............................................. 2-5
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Ignitionswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
SideDoors
Starting Your Engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Driving Through Deep Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Five-Speed Manual Transmission .............................
2-19
LockingRearAxle .........................................
2-21
2-21
ParkingBrake ............................................
Parking Over Things ThatBurn ...............................
2-24
EngineExhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
AutomaticTransmission
2-1
.........................................
Manual Transfer Case ....................................
2-27
Electronic Transfer Case..................................
2-29
Four-wheel Drive
Windows ................................................
2-31
....................................................
TiltWheel ...............................................
Turn SignaYMultifunction Lever ..............................
2-33
2-34
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator ......................
2-34
...............................
2-36
Horn
Headlight High-Low Beam
..
.
2-27
......................................
Windshield Washer ......................................
Cruise Control ..........................................
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory Power Outlets ....................................
Cigarette LightedAshtray ...................................
Windshield Wipers
2-33
2-36
2-37
2-39
2-45
2-48
2-51
2-52
Storage Compartments ......................................
2-53
Instrument Cluster .........................................
2-55
Wamrng Lights, Gages and Indicators .......................
2-58
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Feed Wire
Trailer Wiring Harness ......................................
2-2
2-68
Keys
The square-shaped
key is for the ignition
only.
I
2-3
The oval-shaped key
is for the doors and all
other locks.
\
\
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes plugs~ffom
the
the
keys, and gives them to thefirst owner.
a qualified locksmith
Each plug hasa code on it that tells your dealer or
how to make extra keys. Keep the plugs
in a safe place.If you lose your
keys, you'll be able to have newones made easilyusing these plugs.
~~
-.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent
theft. But you can have a lot
of trouble getting into your
vehide
if' you ever lockyour keys inside.You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in.
So be sare you have extra keys.
Your Doors And How They Work
Side Doors
To open the door from
the outside,lift the
handle and pull the
door open.
To open the door from
the inside, pullthe
lever toward you and
push the door open.
2-5
I
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle:
From the outside: Use
your door key.
1
From the inside:To
lock the door, slide the
lever on your inside
door to LOCK.
To unlock the door,
slide the lever on your
inside door toward
you. You will see a
red area on the lever.
2-6
I
t
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has
power door locks,
push LOCK on the
power doorlock
switch on either front
door. This switch will
lock all thedoors at
once.
To unlock the doors, push on the raised area next to the key symbol.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your do-or and set the
locks from inside. Then get out and close the door.
Tailgate
You can open the
tailgate by pulling up
on the handle while
pulling the tailgate
down.
When you putthe
tailgate back up, be
sure it latches
securely.
2-7
Tailgate Removal
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly and
remove both
retaining cables.
2. Lift the tailgate at
the right side and
pull it out at the
left side.
Reverse the
procedure to
reinstall. Make
sure the tailgate
is secure.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your
vehicle hasa number of theft deterrent features,we know that nothingwe
put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can
help.
Key in the Ignition
If you walk away from your vehicle with thekeys inside, it’s an easy target
for joy riders or professional thieves- so don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime
reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you.
Always do this.Your steering wheel will be locked, and
so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also
locks your transmission.And remember to lock the doors.
2-8
Parking at Night
Park in a lightedspot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember
to keep your valuables outof sight. Put themin a storage area, or take them
with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best
to lockit up and take your keys.
But what if you have to
leave your ignition
key? What if you have to
leave something valuablein your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Then take the door key with you.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your modern vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate‘70reak-in.” But
it will perform better in the
long run if‘ you followthese
guidelines:
Keep your speedat 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first
500 miles (804 km).
Don’t drive at anyone speed- fast or slow - for the first
500 miles (804 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322km) or
so. During this time your
new brake linings aren’t
yet broken
in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this “b’reaking-in” guideline
every timeyou get new brake linings.
2-9
Ignition Switch
Use your ignition key to start your vehicle. The ignition key lets you turn
the ignition switch tofive different positions.
1. OFF
2
2. RUN
3
3. START
4. ACC
5 . LOCK
ACC (Accessory): ACClets you use thingslike the radio and the
windshield wipers whenthe engine is off. To get into ACC, push in the key
and turnit toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked,
just as it
was before you inserted the key.
NOTICE:
Prolonged operationof accessories in the ACC position could
drain vour battery and prevent you
from starting your vehicle.
LOCK: This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transmission.
It’s a theft deterrent feature.You will only be able to remove your key when
the ignition is turned LOCK.
to
OFF: This position lets you turn off the enginebut still turn the steering
wheel. Use OFF if you must have your vehiclein motion whilethe engine
is off (for example,if your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN: This is the position for driving.
START: This starts your engine.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in “Lockyy and
you can’t turn it, besure
If it is, then turn the steering
wheel Ieftand
it is all the way
right while you turn thekey hard. Butturn the key only with
your hand.Using a tool to force it could break key
the or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, thenyour vehide needs
service.
in.
Key Release Lever
The ignition key
cannot be removed
from the ignition of
manual transmission
vehwles unlessthe
key release leveris
used.
To Remove the Key
Turn the key to theLOCK position while pressingthe key release lever
down at the same time. Keeping your
finger on the lever, pull the key
straight out.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the keyLOCK
to
and pull it
straight out.
2- 11
Starting Your Engine
Engines start differently. The 8th digit
of your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) shows the code letter
or number for your engine. You will
find the VIN at the top left
of your instrument panel. (See “Vehicle
Identification Number”in the Index.) Follow the proper steps to start the
engine.
Automatic transmission:
Move your shift lever to“P” (Park) or “ N ’ (Neutral). Your engine won’t
start in any other position-that’s a safety feature.To restart when you’re
already moving, use“N” (Neutral) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to “P” (Park)
if your vehicle is moving. If you
do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to “P” (Park) only
when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual transmission:
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor, then shift your gear selector to neutral
while starting the engine.
Your vehicle won’t startif the clutch pedalis not
all theway down -that’s a safety feature.
To start your 2.2 Liter engine:
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to “Start.”
When the engine starts, let goof the key. The idle speed will go down
as your engine gets
warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in “Start” for longer than
15 seconds at a time
will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the
excessive heat can damage your starter motor.
2. If your enginestill won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be
flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key
in “Start”
for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal for
down
five or
six seconds. This clearsthe extra gasoline from the engine.
2-12
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your
accessories, you could
vehicle. If you add electrical parts or
change theway the fuel injection system operates. Before adding
electrical equipment, checkwith your dealer. If you don’t, your
engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see the partof this
manual thattells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle.
See “Towing Your Vehicle”in theIndex.
To start your 4.3 Liter engine:
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to “Start.”
When the engine starts, let go of the key.The idle speed will go down
as your engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding yourkey in “Start” for longer than
15 seconds at a time
will cause your battery to be drained much
sooner. And the
excessive heat can damage your starter
motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in “Start.”
If it doesn’t start
in three seconds, push
the accelerator pedal about one-quarterof the
way down for 12 more seconds, or untilit starts.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops),it could be
flooded with too much gasoline.
Try this:
Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down. Then push your
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor.
Hold it there. Then, hold the
key in “Start”for no more than ten seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
If the engine still doesn’t start, wait another 15 seconds and
do it all
again.
When the engine starts, let goof the key andthe accelerator pedal.
2-13
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to workwith the electronics in your
vehicle. If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could
change theway the fuel injection system operates. Before adding
electrical equipment, checkwith your dealer. If you don’t, your
engine might not performproperly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see the partof this
manual thattells how to doit without damaging yourvehicle.
See “Towing Your Vehicle”in theIndex.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddlesor standing water,
water cancome in through yourengine’s air intake andbadly
damage yourengine. If you can’t avoid deep puddles
or standing
water, drive through them very
slowly.
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater)
(Option)
2.2 Liter
1. Engine coolant heater cordcap
2. Engine coolant heater cordclip
2- 14
i
4.3 Liter
1. Engine coolant heatercord cap
2. Engine coolant heater cord strap
In very cold weather,0°F (-18 "C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can
help. You'll get easier starting and better
fuel ec-onomy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be pluggedin a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To use the coolant heater:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt outlet.
I NOTICE:
After you've used the coolant heater,
be sure to store the cord as
If vou
it was before to keepit away from moving engine parts.
don't, it could be damaged.
2-15
I
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer
depends on the weather, the kindof oil you have, and some other
things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
GMa
dealer in the area where you’ll
be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give
you the best advicefor that particular area.
Automatic Transmission
I
There are several
different positionsfor
your shift lever.
P (Park)
This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
2- 16
R (Reverse)
Use this gear to back
up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to “R” (Reverse) while your vehicle
is moving forward
could damage your transmission. Shift to
“R” (Reverse) only
after your vehicleis stopped.
To rock your vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice or sand
without damaging your transmission,see T f You’re Stuck In Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow” in the hdex.
N (Neutral)
In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart
when you’re already moving,use “ N ’ (Neutral) only. Also, use“N”
(Neutral) when your vehicle is being towed.
2- 17
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out
of “P”
(Park) or“N” (Neutral) with the engine racing isn’t covered by
your warranty.
@ (Overdrive)
This position isfor normal driving.If you need morep rer f _r
passing, and you’re:
.
-
Going less than about35 mph (56 ludh), push your accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
- Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
@ should not be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy
load, driving on steep hills, orfor off-road driving. Select “D”
(Third Gear) when operating the vehicle under any of these
conditions.
D (Third Gear)
This is like @, but you never go into Overdrive.
You should use “D”
(Third Gear)when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on
steep hills, or for off-road driving.
2 (Second Gear)
This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy.
You can
use “2” (Second Gear) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go
down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
If you manually select“2” (Second Gear), the transmission will drive
in second gear.You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear
wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from
a stop on
slippery road surfaces.
1 (First Gear)
This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy)
than “2” (Second Gear). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep
snow or mud. If the selector lever is put“1”
in (First Gear), the
transmission won’t shift into“1” (First Gear) until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
2- 18
NOTICE:
If your rearwheels can’t rotate, don’ttry to drive. This might
happen if you were stuck invery deep sand or mud or were up
against asolid object. You could damage yourtransmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold yourvehicle there
with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheatand damage
“P” Park to hold
the transmission.Use your brakes or shift into
your vehicle in position ona hill.
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
This is your shift
pattern. Here’s how to
operate your
transmission:
1 (First Gear)
Press the clutch pedal and shift
into “1 ” (First Gear). Then, slowly let
up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into “1” (First Gear) when you’re going less than20 mph
(32 km/h). If you’ve cometo a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into
onup
the
“1” (First Gear), put the shift lever in“N” (Neutral) and let
clutch. Pressthe clutch pedal back down. Then shift
into “1” (First
Gear).
0
2 (Second Gear)
Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift
into “2” (Second Gear). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
0
3’4 and 5 (Third, Fourth and Fifth Gears)
Shift into “3” (Third Gear), “4” (Fourth Gear), and “5” (Fifth Gear) the
same way you do for “2” (Second Gear). Slowly let upon the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
2-19
To Stop
Let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before
the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift
to “ N ’ (Neutral).
N (Neutral)
Use this positionwhen you start or idle your engine.
R (Reverse)
To back up, press down the clutch pedal, wait about
6 seconds, then
shift into“ R ’ (Reverse). Thenlet up on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to“R” (Reverse) only after your vehicle is stopped.
Shifting to“R” (Reverse) while your vehicleis moving could
damage your transmission.
Also, use “R” (Reverse), along with the parking brake,
for parking your
vehicle.
Shift Light
If you have a manual
transmission, you
have a SHIFT light.
This light will show
you when to shift to
the next higher gear
for best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next high€ ;ear if weather,
road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate
slowly and shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal
for the light to go on and
off if you
quickly changethe position of the accelerator. Ignore theSHIFT light when
you downshift.
2-20
F
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Only: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive
and is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard the shift
light when
the transfer caseis in 4LO.
Locking RearAxle
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you additional traction on
snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most
of the
time, but whenone of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, the
locking feature will allow the. wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
To Set the Parking Brake:
Hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
right foot. Push down
the parking brake
pedal with yourleft
foot. If the ignition is
on, thebrake'system
warning light will
come on.
To Release the Parking Brake:
Hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pullthe
brake release lever.
I
2-21
. .
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to
overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also
damage other partsof your vehicle.
If you are on a hill:
See “Parking on Hills” in
the Index. That section
shows howto turn your front wheels.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anySee
hill:
“Towing a
Trailer” in the Index. That section shows whatdotofirst to keep the trailer
from moving.
Shifting Into ‘6P’’
(Park)
(AutomaticTransmission Models Only)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking
brake.
2-22
I
I
2. Move the shift lever into “P”(Park) position like this:
0
0
Bull the lever toward you.
Move the lever up asfar as it will go.
3. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear-not in “ N ’ (Neutral).
4. Move the ignition key toLOCK.
5. Remove the key and take
it with you. If you can walk away from your
vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is
“P”in
(Park).
Leaving Your Vehicle Wth the Engine Running
(Automatic Transmission Models Only)
2-23
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking ona hill and you don’t shift your transmission into
“P’
(Park) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on the
parking pawl in the transmission.
You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of “P” (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake andthen shift into“P” (Park) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat.To find outhow, see “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)”in the
Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of “P” (Park)
BEFORE you release the parking brake.
If “torque lock” does occur,
you may need to have another vehicle push
yours a little uphill to take someof the pressure from the transmission,
so
you can pullthe shift lever outof “ P ’ (Park).
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission
Models Only)
Before you get out of yourvehicle, turn off your engine, put your manual
transmission in “ R ’ (Reverse) and firmly apply the parking brake.
l r you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure
your transfer case isin a drive gear. Your vehicle could rollif it isn’t.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is equipped to tow
a trailer,
see “Parking on Hills” or “Towinga Trailer” in the Index.
Parking Over Things That Burn
8
2- 24
Engine Exh'ausf
2-25
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. ifBut
you ever have to,here
are some thingsto know.
If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case
shift lever and
your transfer case is in “N” (Neutral), your vehicle will be free to roll, even
if your shift leveris in “ P ’ (Park). So, be sure the transfer case
is in a drive
gear -not in “ N ’ (Neutral). Follow the proper steps
to be sure your vehicle
won’t move. See “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index.
2-26
Four- Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your engine’s driving
power to all four wheels for extra traction.
To shift outof two-wheel drive
and into four-wheel drive, move the transfer case shift lever 4HI
to or 4LO.
You should use2HI for most normal driving conditions, however.,
NOTICE:
Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long time on dry or
wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.
Manual Transfer Case
If your four-wheel
drive vehicle has the
manual transfer case,
the transfer case shift
lever is on the floor to
the rightof the driver.
Use this lever to shift
into and out of
four-wheel drive.
An indicatorlight near thelever shows you the transfer
- case
casesettings:
settings:
2HI
@
4HI
NSETPARK
BRAKE
4LO
2-27
The front axle portionof the diagram onthe indicator will light up when
you shift into four-wheel drive. A slight delay between shifting and the
pattern’s lighting is normal.If the pattern does notlight up, or if the front
axle does not go out after you shift of
outfour-wheel drive, have your
dealer check your system. Turn the
INT LIGHTSswitch located to the
right of your headlight switch to dim your transfer case indicator light when
your headlights or parking lights are on. This will also cause your
instrument panel lights to dim.
..
2HI: This setting isfor driving in most street and highway situations. Your
front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive.
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use
4HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.
N SET PARK BRAKE: Shift to this neutral setting only when your vehicle
needs to be towed.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle
to give you extra traction.
You may never need4LO. It sends the maximum power to all four wheels.
You might choose4LO if you were driving off-roadin sand, mud, or deep
snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
You can shift from 2HI to 4HI or from 4HI to 2HI while the vehicle is
moving. It is not necessary for you to press the transfer case shift
lever
button. Your front axle will engage fasterif you take your footoff of the
accelerator for a few seconds after you shift.
To shift your transfer case into
N SET PARK BRAKE:
1. Stop the vehicle and shift your transmission into“N” (Neutral).
2. Set the parking brake. Your vehicle can roll unless the brakes are
applied.
To shift into or outof 4LO :
1. The vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
3 mph (4.8 W h )
with the transmission in“ N ’ (Neutral) or the clutch pedal depressed.
2. Press the transfer case shift button and shiftone
in continuous motion.
Don’t pause inN SET PARK BRAKE as youshift into or out of4L0, or
your gears could clash.
Remember that drivingin 4HI or 4LO may reducefuel economy. Also,
driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could cause your tires to wear
faster and make your transfer case harder to shift.
2-28
I
Electronic TransferCase
If your four-wheel drive vehicle hasthe electronic transfer case, the transfer
case switchesare on the right side of your instrument panel above the radio
controls. Use these switches to shift
into and out of four-wheel drive. You
can choose among three driving settings:
1. 2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations.
Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive.
2. 4HI: This setting engages yourfront axle to help drive your vehicle.
Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads,
or in most off-road situations.
3. 4LO: This setting also engages yourfront axle to give you extra
traction. You may never need4LO. It sends the maximum power to all
four wheels. You might choose4LO if you were driving off-road in
sand, mud, deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
Amber indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in.
The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignitionand
one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle
in for service. When shifting, an indicator
light will flash until the shiftis
completed then remain solidlylit.
To shift from 2HIto 4HI: Press and release the4HI switch. This can be
done at any speed, and the
front axle will lock automatically.
To shift from 4HIto 2HI: Press and release the2HI switch. This can be
done at any speed, and thefront axle will unlock ; omaticallv.
2-29
To shift from 2H1,or 4HI to 4LO:The vehicle must be stoppedor
moving less than 3 rnph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in“N” (Neutral)
or the clutch pedal depressed.
The preferred method for shifting into4LO is
to have your vehicle slowly moving1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 ludh). Press and
release the4LO switch. You must waitfor the amber 4LO indicator lightto
stop flashing and go solid amber before shifting your transmission
into gear
or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving,
the amber 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete
the shift unless your vehicleis below 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission
is in “N” (Neutral)or the clutch pedal depressed.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles:If your transfer case does not
shift into 4L0, your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment.
With your transmissionin “ N ’ (Neutral), press and release the4LO switch.
While the amber4LO indicator light is flashing, shift your transmission into
P (Park).
Wait until the 4LO indicator lightgo - - solid amber before shifting your
transmission into gear. This will get
you into 4L0, but you should take your
vehicle infor service so normal operation can be restored.
To shift from 4LO to 4HI:Your vehicle must be stopped or moving less
than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmissionin “N” (Neutral) and the clutch
pedal depressed. The preferred method for shifting outof 4LO is to have
your vehicle slowly moving1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release
the 4HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing
and go solid amber before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing
the clutch pedal.
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicleis in gear and/or moving, the
4HI indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds but not complete the shift
unless the vehicleis below 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in
“ N ’ (Neutral) or the clutch pedal depressed.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles:If your transfer case does not
shift into4H1, your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment.
With your transmission in“ N ’ (Neutral), press and release the4HI switch.
While the4HI indicator lightis flashing, shift your transmission into
P (Park). Wait until the 4HI indicator light goes solid amber before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into4H1, but you should take
your vehicle infor service so normal operation can be restored.
2-30-
I
t
Windows
To open your manual
windows, turn the
hand crank on each
door to raise or lower
your side door
windows.
If you have the
optional power
windows, the controls
are on eachof the side
doors. Your power
windows will only
work when the
ignition has been
turned to RUN.
The driver’s window switch has an “express” feature
that allows it to lower
faster than the passenger’s window.The driver’s door also has a switch for
the passenger windows.
Push the down arrow on the switch to lower the window.
Push the up arrow on the switch to raise
the window.
2-31
Sliding Rear Window
Your vehicle may have a sliding rear window.
Push the latchin the
center of the window
and slide the glass to
open it.
When you close the
window, be sure the
latch catches.
Swing-Out Windows (Extended Cab)
If your vehicle as
h
rear swing-out
windows, just unlatch
them at their clasps
and pushout on the
glass to open them.
Horn
Press the padin the
center ofthe steering
wheel to sound the
horn.
Tilt Wheel (Option)
A tilt steering wheel
allows you to adjust
the steering wheel
before you drive.
You can also raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room
when
you enter andexit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the
steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
2-33
Turn SignaUMultifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:
0
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
0
Headlight High-Low Beam
0
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (Option)
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has
two upward (for
Right) and two
downward (for Left)
positions. These
positions allow youto
signal a turnor a lane
change.
To signal a turn, move the lever the
all way up or down. When theturn is
finished, the lever will return automatically.
2-34
A green arrow on the
instrument panel will
flash in the direction
of the turn or lane
change.
To signal a lane change,
just raise or lower the lever until the green arrow
starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change.
The lever
will return by itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t flash
just stay
but
on, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
If a bulbis burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident.
If the green
arrows don’t goon at all when you signala turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses”
in the Index) and
for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiringthe
fortrailer lights,a
different turn signal flasher
is used. With this flasher installed, the signal
indicator will flash evenif a turn signal bulbis burned out. Checkthe front
and rear turn signal lights regularly to make
sure they are working.
Operation Of Lights
Although your vehicle’s lighting system (headlights, parking lights, fog
lamps, side marker lights and taillights) meets all applicable federal lighting
requirements, certain states and provinces
may apply their own lighting
regulations that may require special attention before you operate these
lights.
For example, some jurisdictions may require that you operate your fog
lamps only when your lower beam headlights
are also on, or that headlights
be turned on whenever you must use your windshield wipers. In addition,
most jurisdictions prohibit driving solely with parking lights, especially
at
dawn or dusk.It is recommended that you check with your own
state or
provincial highway authorityfor applicable lighting regulations.
2 -35
Headlight High-Low Beam
To change the
headlights from low
beam to high or high
to low, pull theturn
signal lever all the
way toward you. Then
release it.
When the high beams
are on, this blue
indicator lighton the
instrument panel also
will beon.
Windshield Wipers
You control the
windshield wipers by
turning the band with
the wiper symbol on
it.
2-36
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
MIST. Hold it there until the
wipers start, thenlet go. The wipers will stop after one cycle.
If you want
more cycles, hold the band on
MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed
for a long or short delay between wipes. This
can be very useful inlight rain or snow. Turn the band choose
to
the delay
time. The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from you toLO
the
position. For high speed wiping, turn the band further,
to HI. To stop the
wipers, move the band to the off symbol.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well
enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from
the wiper blades before using them.
If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
If your blades do become damaged, get new
blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice c overload y---r wipers. A circuit breaker will stop
them until the motor cools. Clear away snow
or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
At the topof the multifunction lever there’sa paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol andPUSH. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your
preset speed.
2-37
Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous.
A bad mud splash can block
your vision. You could hit another vehicle
or go off the road. Checkyour
washes fluid level often.
NOTICE:
When using concentrated washer fluid,follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can
cause the solutionto freeze and damage your washer fluid
tank and other parts
of the washersystem. Also, water
doesn’t clean as well as washerfluid.
0
Fill your washer fluidtank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold.
if it is
This allows for expansion, which could damage the tank
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield
washer. It
can damage your washer system and paint.
Cruise Control (Option)
With Cruise Control,you can maintain a speed
of about 25 mph (40 kndh)
or more without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. This can really help
on long trips. Cruise Control does not work
at speeds below about25 mph
(40 km/h).
If you have a manual transmission and you apply your brakes or push the
clutch pedal, theCmise Control will shut off.
2-39
To Set Cruise Control
Move the Cruise
Control switch to
ON.
0
0
0
Get up to the speed you want.
Push in the set button at the end
of the lever and release
it.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-40
To Resume a Set Speed
Suppose you set your Cruise Control ata desired speed and then you apply
the brake. This,of course, shuts off the Cruise Control.
But you don’t need
to reset it. Once you’re going about25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can
move the Cruise Control switchfrom ON to R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for
about half a second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.
Remember, if you holdthe switch at R/A (Resume/Accelerate) longer than
half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release
the switch
or apply the brake.You could be startled and evenlose control. So unless
you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch R/A
at (Resume/Accelerate).
2-41
To Increase Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two waysto go to a higher speed. Here’s first:
the
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push the button at
the endof the lever, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
Here’s the second:
Move the Cruise switch fromON to IUA (Resume/Accelerate). Hold it
there untilyou get up tothe speed you want, and then release the
switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch toWA
(Resume/Accelerate). Each timeyou do this, your vehicle willgo about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
2-42
To Reduce Speed While Usingwuise Control
0
Push in the
button atthe end
of the lever until
you reach the
lower speed you
want, then release
it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the buttonfor less than half
a second. Each time youdo this, you’ll go 1 mph(1.6 kmh) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot
off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down
to the Cruise Control speed
you
set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your Cruise Control will work on hills depends upon your speed,
load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may
have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed
down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out
of Cruise Control. Many
drivers find thisto be too much trouble and don’t use Cruise Control on
steep hills.
2-43
To Get Outof Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn
off the Cruise Control:
@
Step lightly on
the brake pedal or
push the clutch
pedal, if you have
a manual
transmission
Move the Cruise
switch to OFF,
To Erase Speed Memory
When you turnoff the Cruise Control or the ignition, your Cruise Control
set speed memory is erased.
:
Your light switches
are on theleft side of
your instrument panel.
Push the top switch
to turn on:
Parking Lights
0
Sidemarker Lights
0
Taillights
0
License Plate Lights
0
Instrument Panel Lights
0
Transfer Case Shift Indicator Panel
Push the bottom switchto turn on the headlights, together with:
Parking Lights
Sidemarker Lights
Taillights
License Plate Lights
Instrument Panel Lights
Transfer Case Shift Indicator Panel
Push the switch markedOFF to turn off your lights.
Turn the switch tothe right of the headlight switch up to make your
instrument panel and transfer case
lights brighter. Turn the switch all the
way upuntil it clicks to turn on the interior lights.
Turn the switch down to
dim your instrument panel and transfer case
indicator lights.
You can switch your headlights from high to low beam
by pulling on the
multifunction lever.
I
.2-45
A circuit breaker protects your headlights.If you have an electrical
overload, your headlights will flicker
on and off. Have your headlight
wiring checked right away if this happens.
Fog Lamps (Option)
Use yourfog lamps
for better vision in
foggy or misty
conditions. Your
parking lights and/or
low beam headlights
must beon or your
fog lamps won't work.
The fog lamp switch
is on the instrument
panel under the
headlight switch.
Press the left sideof the switch to turn the fog lamps on, and the right side
of the switchto turn them off.A light will glow in the right side of the
switch when theyare on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off
as much light as your
headlights.
Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on your headlights.
Fog lamps will gooff whenever your high beam headlights comeon. When
the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come
on again.
2-46
I
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Indicator Light
(Canada Only)
If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in Canada, you will have this light
on the instrument panel.
It goes on wheneverthe Daytime Running Lights
are on, the ignitionis on, the headlamp switchis off, and the parking brake
is released.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The Canadian Federal Government has decided that “Daytime Running
Lights” (DRL)is a useful feature, in that
DRL can make your vehicle more
visible to pedestrians and other drivers during daylight hours. DRL
is
required on new vehicles sold in Canada.
The high beam headlights will come
on at reduced brightnessin daylight
when:
0
The ignition is on,
The headlight switchis off, and
The parking brake is released.
When you turn on your headlights, the
DRL will switch off and the exterior
lights will comeon. When you turnoff the headlights, the exterior lights
will go out and the high beams will change the
to reduced brightnessof
DRL again.
The DRL indicatorlight on the instrument panel will
go on whenever the
DRL is on. This light means that only the DRL
is on. When you turn on
your exterior lights, thislight will 20 out.
If the DRL indicator light
is on at uawn or dusk,it is a reminderto turn on
your headlights.
2-47
Of course, you maystill turn on the headlights any time you need to.
To idle your vehicle with the
DRL off, set the parking brake. The
DRL will
stay off until you releasethe parking brake.
Headlights-On Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlights or parking lights are
turned on and your ignition
is in OFF, LOCK or ACC. To turn the tone off,
turn the dimmer switch all the
way down.
Dome Light
The dome light will
come on when you
open the sidedoors.
You can also turn the
dome light on by
turning the dimmer
switch up untilit
clicks.
Mirrors
Inside Mirror
Press thetab under the
mirror to reduce glare
from headlights
behind you.
If your vehicle has optional map lights, they will automatically come
for on
approximately 15 seconds when either front door is opened,
or until the
ignition is turned toRUN or ACC.
They will also stay onfor 15 seconds when the interior light switch on the
dash is turned on then
off, while the ignition is off.
Outside Mirrors
Adjust your outside
mirrors so you can
just see theside of
your vehicle.
Manual mirrors
should be adjustedby
pressing the glass as
needed.
Some vehicles come
with a remote control
switch for adjusting
the outside mirrors.
Find the switch on the
driver's side door.
Move the switch to
the rightor left to
choose the mirror,
then move the switch
from side to side or up
and down as needed.
2-49
Your outside mirrors must be folded in before entering a carwash.
To fold,
pull the mirrorsin towards the vehicle.f i s h the mirrors back out when
finished.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your right side mirror is convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curvedso you can see more from the driver’s
seat.
Sun VisorsNanity Mirrors
To block out glare, you canswing down the visors.You can also swing them
from side to side. Your visors have an extension that can be pulled
out for
additional glare protection.
Your visor will have a
strap for holding small
items, such as maps.
2-50
Some visors have a
lighted mirror. Just lift
the cover up to turn on
the mirror lights.
Accessory PowerOutlets (Option)
If you have accessory
power outlets,you can
plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment.
Just pull down from
the topof the door and
follow the proper
installation
instructions that are
included with any
electrical equipment
you install.
These circuits are protected by afuse and have maximum current levels.
NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlets, maximum electrical
load must not exceed
25 amps. Always turnoff any electrical
equipment when notin use. Leaving electrical equipmenton for
extended periods will drain your battery.
2-51
Cigarette Lighter/Ashtray
To use the lighter,
press itin all theway,
and let go. When it’s
ready, it will pop back
by itself.
Don’t holda cigarette lighter in with your hand while
it is heating.If you
do, it won’t ‘be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready.
That can makeit overload, damaging the lighter and the heating element.
The ashtray must be
completely pulled out
to open position
before the ashtray
cover opens and
smoking material can
be deposited.
Don’t put papers and other things that
bum into your ashtray.If you do,
cigarettes or other smoking materials could them
set on fire causing
damage.
To remove the ashtray, lift the release tab as high as possible, then remove
the tray.
2-52
~
Storage Compartments
Your vehicle may
have a console
compartment between
the bucket seats.To
open it, just squeeze
the lever in the front
of the console while
lifting the top of the
console. Your console
also includes a handy
place to hold cups.
To open your glove
box, squeeze the lever
at the topof the
glovebox and lower
the door.
Two cup aepressions
are provided €or your
conve~ence,but the
gkovebox should not
be open while driving,.
2-53
A storage
compartment under
your radio may be
used to hold small
items.
You will find a storage
pocket on eachof the
front doors.
You also have a storage pocketon the backof your bucket or60/40 bench
seats.
Some vehicles have a
storage area behind
the seat
I
2-54
Instrument
Panel
1. Vents
2. Instrument Cluster
3. Air ConditionerFteater
4. Glove Box
5. Sound System
6. Cigarette Lighter
~
.
-,
.
7 . Brake Release Handle
8. Light Switches
9. Electronic Transfer Case
10. Fog Lamp Switch
11. Ashtray
12. Storage Compartment
Instrument Cluster
Your instmmnt dustex is designed to let youknow at a glance howyaur
vehicle is.running. You’ll h o w bow fast^ you’re going, about how much
fuel you’ve used, -andmany other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
2-5.5
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets
you see your speed in
both miles per hour
(mph) and kilometers
per hour( W h ) .
All speedometers will show speeds up
to 85 mph (140km/h), but if you
have a 4.3L(VIN W) engine with a tachometer, the speedometer will show
speeds up to100 mph (160 W h ) .
Your odometer shows howfar your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles
(used in the U.S.) or kilometers (used in Canada).
Tamper Resistant Odometer
Tachometer
Standard
Cluster
Cluster
Your odometer is tamper resistant. It will show silver lines between the
numbers if someone tries toturn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer
installed. If thenew one can beset to the mileage total of the old odometer,
then it must be. But ifit can't, then it's setat zero, and a label must be put
on the driver's door to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
2-56
Trip Odometer
Tachometer
Standard
Cluster
Cluster
I
The trip odometer cantell you how far your vehicle has been driven since
you last set the trip odometer to zero. Make sure the button is completely
depressed.
To set the trip odometer to zero, completely push the button near the
readout.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Each tachometer has a different limit depending on the powertrain in your
vehicle. The tachometer has three areas: normal operating range, yellow
warning range, and’red danger range.
Normal operating range shows your engine speed during normal driving
conditions. For example, when the needle points2,to
it means the engineis
2-57
running at 2,000 revolutions per minute (rpm).
The tachometer needle will
vary all the time that the engine
is running.
The yellow warning range tells you that your engine speed is reaching
its
upper limits. Don’t drive very long with
the tachometer in the yellow range.
If you have a manual transmission, shift to
a higher gear as soon as possible.
If you have an automatic transmission,
lift your foot offof the accelerator
pedal so that the transmission can select
a higher gear.
The Red danger range tells you that your engine speed is
its at
upper limits.
You should immediately shift toa higher gear, or lift your foot
off of the
accelerator pedal.If you drive for very long with the tachometer inthe red
danger range, engine damage will result.
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area,
or engine damagewill occur.
I
Warning Lightsy Gages and Indicators
This section describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your
vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before
it
becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement.
Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you
or
others from injury.
Warning lightsgo on when there may be or is
a problem with oneof your
vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next few pages,
some warning lights come on briefly when you turn the ignitionjust
keyto
let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you
should notbe alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may
be or isa problem with one of your
vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together
to let you
know when there’sa problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are
driving, orwhen one of the gages shows there may be
a problem, check the
section that tellsyou what to do about it. Please follow the manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
- and even dangerous.So please get to
know your warning lights and gages. They’re
a big help.
2-58
I
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts.
If one part
isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking,
though, you need both parts working well.
Your vehicle also has rear-wheel or four-wheel anti-lock brakes. See
“Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.If the warning light comeson, there could
be a brake problem with either your regular or rear-wheel anti-lock brakes,
or both. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on as you start the vehicle.
If it doesn’t come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull
off the road and stop
carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal may
go closerto the floor.It may take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have
the vehicle towedfor service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”in the Index.)
The brake system warninglight will also comeon when you set your
parking brake, andit will stay onif your parking brakedoesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released,it means you have a
brake problem.
2-59
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light (Option)
If your vehicle has
four-wheel anti-lock
brakes, it will have
this yellow light.
3
With anti-lock, this light will go on when you start your engine and may
stay on for several seconds. That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come
on,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you
if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes.
See “Brake System Warning Light”
earlier in this part.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
I
engine coolant
temperature. If the
gage pointer moves
into the red area, your
engine is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you shouldoffpull
the road, stop your vehicle and turn
off the engineas soon as possible.
Hot Coolant Can Burn you Badly!In Problems On The Road, this manual
explains whatto do. See “Engine Overheating’’ in the Index.
2-60
Malfunction Indicator (Service Engine Soon) Lamp
A computer monitors operationof your fuel, ignition and emission control
systems. Thislight should come on when
the ignition is on, but the engine is
not running, asa check to show you
it is working. If it does not comeon at
all, haveit fixed right away.If it stays on, or it comes on while you are
driving, the computeris indicating that you havea problem. You should
take your vehiclein for service soon.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while
the emission controls won’t work as well, your fuel economy
won’t be as good and your engine may
not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
2-61
Oil Pressure Gage
I
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per
square inch) when the engineis running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure inP a (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure
zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil
level or other problems causing low oil pressure.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected
oil problems can be
costly andis not covered by your warranty.
Indicator Lights
Indicator lightsgo on when you use your turn signals, change from low
beam headlights to high beams, or when you use your hazard flashers.
The
next few pages will also tell you about the indicator lights on your vehicle
and help you locate them.
Charging System Light
The charging system
light is on your
instrument cluster and
will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, but the
engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
It should go out once theengine is running.If it stays on, or comeson while
you are driving, you may havea problem with the charging system.It could
indicate that you have problems with
a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Haveit checked right away. Driving while this light is on
could drain your battery.
If you must drivea short distance withthe light on, be certain to turn
off all
your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.
Check Gages Light
This Check Gages
light is on the
instrument cluster and
will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine. If the light
comes on and stays on
while you are driving,
check your various
gages to see if they are
in the warning zones.
2-63
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Indicator Light
(Canada Only)
This green DRL
indicator light is on
the instrument cluster.
The DRL indicator
light is on whenever
the ignition ison and
the headlight switch
and parking brakeare
off. For more details
about DRL,see
“Lights” in this
section.
:.
SHIFT Indicator Light
This amberSHIFT
indicator light is on
the instrument cluster
of vehicles with
manual transmissions.
The SHIFT indicator
light will helpyou get
the bestfuel economy.
See “Shift Indicator
Light” in this section.
2-64
Headlight High Beam Indicator Light
This blue high beam
indicator lightis on
the instrument cluster
and is on whenever
you use your high
beam headlights. For
more details about
high beams, see
“Headlight High-Low
Beam Changer” in this
section.
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
instrument cluster.
The turn signal
indicator will come on
whenever you signala
turn or lane change.
See “Turn and Lane
Change Signal” in this
section.
2-65
Gages
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage tells
you about how much
fuel you have
remaining, when the
ignition is on. When
the gage first indicates
empty, you still have a
little fuel left, but you
should get more fuel
soon.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a
problem with your fuel gage:
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts
off before the gage reads full.
It takes a little moreor less fuel tofill up than the gage indicated. For
example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half
full, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
thefill
tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity,see the Index under “Fluid Capacities.”
2-66
Voltmeter
I
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is on (inRUN
the
position), this gage shows your battery’s state
of charge inDC volts. When
the engine is running, the gage shows the condition
of the charging system.
Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate
the normal
operating range.
You can only drivefor a short time with
the reading in either warning zone.
If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical
system. Have the vehicle servicedas soon as possible.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Feed Wire
Your vehicle includes a Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL) located
above the rear window.
If equipment suchas a cap or camper is installed, a wire labeled “Center
High MountedStop Lamp (CHMSL)” feed is provided along the left rear
frame. This wire shouldbe used to install a CHMSL in the cap or camper.
2-67
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle may have either a 5-wire or 7-wire harness.
The 5-wire harness is stored under your vehicle, along the left rear frame
crossmember. The harness has no connector, and you should have a
qualified service person wire your harness
for you. Be sureyou leave it
loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but not
so loose thatit
drags on the ground.
Store the harnessin its
original place. Wrap
the h>arness together
and tie it neatly so it
wm’t be damaged.
The 7-wire is stored under your vehicle along the rear frame erossmember.
This harness has a30 Amp. in-line fused battery feed wire and no
connector, and should be wired by
a qualified service person. Attach
the
harness to the trailer, then tape or strap
it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be
sure you leaveit loose enoughso the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but not
so loose that it drags on the ground.
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together andit tie
neatly so it won’t be damaged.
The fuse for trailer wiring is in-line and located
in left front side panel
electrical block.
2-68
Comfort Controls& Audio Systems
Section
I
.
In this part you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control systems and
audio systems offered with your vehicle
. Be sure to read about the particular
.
system supplied with your vehicle
For explanationof vehicle symbols. refer to “Vehicle Symbols” in the
Introduction
Comfort Controls
Flow-Through Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Heater/Air Conditioning Controls ...........................
3-4
3-5
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater)....................
Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
FMStereo ..............................................
3-6
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
AM Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
How to Operate YourE I R@AM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
How to Operate Your ETR@AM-FM Stereo Audio System . . . . . . 3-8
How to Operate Your ETR@AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
How to OperateYour ETR@AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette System
With Equalizer .......................................
3-13
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ..........................
3-16
How to Operate YourETR@AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc
3-17
(CD)Systern ........................................
Care of Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
3-22
.
I
3-1
Comfort Controls
Flow-Through Ventilation System
Your vehicle's flow-through ventilation system supplies outside air to the
inside of your vehicle whenit is moving. With the side windows closed, air
will flow into thefront air inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and the
outrear
air exhaust valve. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater
or
the air conditioning fan
is running.
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inletfree of ice, snow, or any other
obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work
far
better, reducing the chanceof fogging the insideof your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the blower
fan to HI for
a few moments before drivingoff. This helps clear the intake ducts
of
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of
your windows.
Keep the air path underthe front seats clearof objects. This helps air to
circulate throughout your vehicle.
Air Vents
You will find air vents inthe center and on the sides
of your instrument
panel. You can move the vents to direct the flow
of air, or close the vents
altogether. When you close a vent,
it will increase the flow
of air coming out
of any vents that are open.
Heater Controls
If your vehicle does
not have air
conditioning, your
heater controlswill
look like this.
The switch onthe righthand side changes the
fan speed. To increase thefan
speed, push the switch upward toward
HI. To decrease thefan speed, push
the switch downward towardLO .
The upper knob changes the
air temperature. Turn the knob right (clockwise)
for warmer air. Turn theknob left (counterclockwise) for coolerair.
The lower knob changes the heater function and determines which outlets
the air will flow through (instrument panel, defroster, heater,
etc.).
3-3
OFF: This setting turnsoff all heating functions. Some outside air will still
come outof the heater outlet whenever the vehicle is moving forward.
VENT Airflow is through the instrument panel vents.
Set the upper knob to
the temperature desired. This
setting is useful for mild outside temperatures,
when little heating or cooling is desired.
BI-LEV: Outside air comes in through the heater floor vents and the
instrument panel vents. This setting is useful in cool weather with bright
sunlight.
HEAT Heated air comes out through the heater floor vents and windshield
defroster vents. This setting is useful
for cold weather.
BLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the heater floor vent and the
windshield defroster vents. This setting is useful
in cool weather when you
have fog orice on the windshield or side windows.
DEF: This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster vents
and some through the heater vents. This setting is useful when you have fog
or ice on the windshield.
Heater/Air Conditioning Controls
If your vehicle has air
conditioning, your
heatedair conditioning
controls will looklike
this.
Before using your vehicle's air conditioning, open the windows to clear the
vehicle of hot air.
The switch on the righthand side changes fan
the speed. To increase the fan
speed, push the switch upward toward
HI. To decrease the fan speed, push
the switch downward toward
LO .
The upper knob changes the air temperature. Turn the knob right (clockwise)
for warmer air. Turn the knob left (counterclockwise) for cooler air.
The lower knob changes the heater function and determines which outlets
the air will flow through (instrument panel, defroster, heater, etc.).
3-4
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater)
If you use the optionalengine coolant heater before starting your engine,
your heating system will produce warmer air faster, to heat the passenger
compartment in cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in
the Index.
Audio Systems
Your Delco@audio system has been designed to operate easily and give
years of listening pleasure. But you will get the most enjoymentofout
it if
you acquaint yourself withit first. Find out what yourDelco’ system can
do and how to operateall its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most
out
of the advanced engineering that went
into it.
Be aware that hearing damage
from loud noise is almost undetectable until
it is too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes
of sound. Sound that
seems normal can be loud and harmful
to your hearing. Take precautionsby
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your
hearing adapts toit.
3-5
To help avoidhemng loss or aamL_,z
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
0
Increase volume slowly untilyou hear comfortably and clearly.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. FM
But signals will reach only
about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). And, tall buildings or hills can interfere
with FM signals, causingthe sound to come and go.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater thanfor FM, especially at night.
The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other.
AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing
the treble to reduce this noise
if you ever getit.
AM Stereo
This means theDelco’ system can receiveC-QUAM’ stereo broadcasts.
Many AM stations around the country use C-QUAM@ to produce stereo,
though somedo not. (C-QUAM@ is a registered trademarkof Motorola,
kc.) If your DelcoB system can get C-QUAM@, your
“STEREO’ light will
come on when you’re receivingit.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
~ehicle- like a
tape player, CB radio, mobile telephoneor two-way radio -be
sure you can addwhat you want. If you can, it’s very important
to doit properly. Added sound equipmentmay interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco@radio or other
systems, and even damage them. And, yourvehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operationof sound equipment that has
been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check
with your dealer and
be sure tocheck Federal rulescovering mobile radio and
telephone units.
1
3-6
How To Operate Your E T P AM Radio
This part tells you how your
ETR@AM radio works.
Upper Knob (PWR-VOL-RECALL)
The upper knob hasfour functions:
Rotate it to turn the system on and off.
0
Rotate it to control the volume.
0
Press it to display the time when the ignition isoff.
Press it to change betweenthe clock and the radio station frequency
displayed when the radiois on.
BAL (Balance)
The contrQl rimz behind the upper knob adjuststhe lefvright speaker
balance.
Lower Knob
Rotate the lower knob to tune in radio srauons.
The control ring behindthe lower knobis non-functional.
Pushbuttons
The four pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations.
You can set the
pushbuttons for up to six favoriteAM stations. Just:
Tune in the station you want.
0
Press the SET pushbutton. (SET appears in the VF display for a few
seconds.)
0
Within 5 seconds, push oneof the four pushbuttons to store the station,
Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return.
3-7
I
1
NOTE:
Up to two additional stations may be preset
by pressing two adjoining
buttons at the same time.
0 Tune in the desired station.
Press the SET pushbutton.
0 Within 5 seconds, press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same
time. (The station will return when the same two buttons are pressed
again.)
Clock
To set the clock,just:
Press the SET pushbutton.
Within 5 seconds, press and holdMINS until the correct minute
appears on the display.
Press and holdHRS until the correct hour appears on the display.
TREBLE
Slide the TREBLE lever up to increase the treble response.
If the stationis
weak or noisy, slide theTREBLE lever downto reduce the noise.
BASS
Slide the BASS lever up to increase the bass response. Adjust the
BASS
lever to give a pleasing sound
to your ear.
How to Operate Your ETW AM-FM
Stereo Audio System
3-8
1
This part tells you how yourETR@AM-FM stereo audio system works:
Upper Knob (PWR-VOL-RECALL)
The upper knob has thesefour functions:
Rotate it to turn the system on andoff.
Rotate it to control the volume.
Press it to display the time whenthe ignition is off.
0
Press it to change between the clock and the radio station frequency
displayed when~theradio is on.
BAL (Balance)
*
:r
The control ring behind the upper knob adjusts the leftlright me:
balance.
Lower Knob
The lower knob has two functions:
Rotate it to tune in radio stations.
0
Press it to change between the AM and FM bands.
FADE
The control ring behind the lower knob adjusts
the frontlrear speaker
balance.
SEEK
Press theSEEK button to cause the receiver SEEK
to
the next higher
station and stop.
SCAN
When you pressSCAN, the radiowill go tothe next station andpause and
will keep scanning until you press
SCAN again. SCAN appears in the VF
display.
Pushbuttons
The four pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations.
YOU can set the pushbuttons
for up to eight favorite stations(4 AM and
4 FM). Just:
Tune in the desired station.
Press the SET pushbutton. (SET appears in the VF display for a few
seconds.)
0
Within 5 seconds, push one of the four pushbuttons to store the station.
Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return.
NOTE:
Up to two additional stations may be preset
on each band by pressing two
adjoining buttons atthe same time. (The station will return when the same
two buttonsare pressed again.)
Clock
To set the clock, just:
Press the SET pushbutton.
Within 5 seconds, press and holdSEEK until the correct minute
appears on the display.
0
Press and holdSCAN until the correct hour appears on the display.
TREBLE
Slide the TREBLE lever up to increase the treble response.
If a stationis
weak or noisy, slide the
TREBLE lever down to reduce the noise.
BASS
Slide the BASS lever up to increase the bass response. Adjust BASS
the
lever to give a pleasing sound to your
ear.
1
How to OperateYour ET'
Cassette System
AM-FM Stereo Audio
3
This part tells youhow your ETR@AM-FM stereo audio cassette system
works:
Upper Knob (PWR-VOL-PROG-RCL)
The upperknob has these five functions:
0
Rotate it to turn the system on andoff.
Rotate it to control the volume.
0
Press it to display the timewhen the ignitionis off (RCL $.
Press it to change between the clock and the radio station frequency
displayed when the radio
is on (RCL ).
Press it to change sides of a tapewhen a cassette is playing(PROG >.
3-16
BAL (Balance)
The control ring behind the upper knob adjusts the
lefuright speaker
balance.
Lower Knob
The lower knob has two functions:
Rotate it to tune in radio stations.
Press it to change between theAM and FM bands.
FADE
The control ring behind the lower
knob adjusts thefronurear spes
balance.
SEEK
Press theSEEK button to cause the receiver to
SEEK the next higher
station and stop.
SCAN
When you pressSCAN, the radio willgo to the next station and pause, and
will keep scanning untilyou press SCAN again. SCAN appears in the VF
display.
Pushbuttons
The four pushbuttons letyou return to favorite stations. You can set the
pushbuttons for up to eightfavorite stations (4 AM and 4 FM). Just:
Tune in the desired station.
0
Press the SET pushbutton. (SET appears in the VF display for
5 seconds.)
0
Within 5 seconds, push one of the four pushbuttons to store the station.
Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return.
NOTE:
In addition to the four stations set as above,up to two additional stations
may be preset on each bandby pressing two adjoining pushbuttons at the
same time.
Tune in the desired station.
0
Push the SET pushbutton. (SET appears in the VF display for
5 seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, press any two adjoining pushbuttons the
at same
time. (The station will return when the same two buttons
are pressed
again.
3-11
t
Clock
To set the clock,
just:
Press the SET pushbutton.
Within 5 seconds, press and holdSEEK until the correct minute
appears on the display.
Press and holdSCAN until the correct hour appears on the display.
TREBLE
Slide the TREBLE lever up to increase the treble response.
If the stationis
weak or noisy, slide the
TREBLE lever down to reduce the noise.
BASS
Slide theBASS lever up to increase the bass response. Adjust BASS
the
lever to give a pleasing sound to your ear.
AUTO DNR
This unitis equipped with an automatic Dynamic Noise Reduction system.
DNR@reduces background hiss on
AM and FM radio broadcasts, as wellas
on cassette tapes.
@
DNR@is a registered trademarkof National Semiconductor Corporation.
To Play A Cassette
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that 30
areto 45 minutes
long on each side. Tapes longer than that so
arethin they may not work well
in this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the upper and lower
knobs for volume,
balance, and fade just as you dofor the radio. The arrows indicate which
side of the tape is being played.
Fast Forward
Press the button with the arrow pointing
in the same direction that the tape
is playing. Thearrow light next tothe arrow button will belit. To stop fast
forward, press theSTOP-E JECTbutton.
Reverse
Press the button with the arrow pointing
in the opposite direction that the
tape is playing. The arrow light next to the arrow button will be lit. To stop
reverse, press theSTOP-E JECTbutton.
PROGRAM
To change sides of the tape, press thePWR-VOL-PROG-RCL knob.
STOP- EJECT
To stop playing a tape, fully press this button (the cassette will be partially
ejected, and the radio will begin playing).
3-12
How to Operate Your E T P AM-FM Stereo Audio
Cassette System with Equalizer
This part tells you how your
ETR@AM-FM stereo audio cassette system
with equalizer works:
Upper Knob (PWR-VOL-PROG-RCL)
The upper knob has thesefive functions:
Rotate it to turn the system on andoff.
Rotate it to control the volume.
0
Press it to display the time when the ignition is off (RCL ).
0
Press it to change between the clock and the radio station frequency
displayed when the radiois on (RCL ).
Press it to change sidesof a tape when a cassetteis playing (PROG ).
BAL (Balance)
The control ring behind
the upper knob adjuststhe lefdright speaker
balance.
Lower Knob
The lower knob has two functions:
Rotate it to tune in radio stations.
Press it to change between the AM and FM bands.
FADE
The control ring behindthe lower knob adjusts the
fronthear speaker
balance.
SEEK
Press theSEEK button to cause the receiver to
SEEK the next higher
station and stop.
3-13
SCAN
When you pressSCAN, the radio will go to the next station and pause and
will keep scanning until you pressSCAN again. SCAN appearsin the
graphic display.
Pushbuttons
The four pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations.
You can set the
pushbuttons for up to eight favorite stations(4 AM and 4 FM). Just:
Tune in the desired station.
Push the SET pushbutton (SET appears in the VF display for
5 seconds.)
Within the 5 seconds, push oneof the four pushbuttons. Whenever you
press that button, the preset station will return.
NOTE:
In addition to thefour stations set as above, up to two additional stations
may be preset on each band
by pressing two adjoining pushbuttons at
the
same time. Just:
Tune in the desired station.
Press the SET pushbutton (SET appears in the VF display for
5 seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same
time. (The station will return when the same two buttons are pressed
again.
Clock
To set the clock,just:
Press the SET pushbutton.
0
Within 5 seconds, press and hold S
appears on the display.
:K until the correct minute
Press and holdSCAN until the correct hour appears on the display.
Adjust theTone
Use the levers in the upper left corner to set the bass, midrange, and treble
until you get the sound you want. The
60 and 250 levers adjust the bass;
1K is midrange; and 3 S K and 1OK control the treble.
We suggest you start with the center lever (1K) in the midpoint position,
then move the others up until you get the amount
of bass and treble you like.
Am-St Button
The Am-St is just below the SEARCH button. Push this when you tune to
an AM station that broadcastsin stereo. Your STEREO light will comeon
when you’re receivingAM stereo. If you pushA m S t and thereis no more
noise, it means the station is weak. You’ll hear the station better if you don’t
use Am-St. Just pushtheAm-St button again to delete stereo.
3- 14
AUTO DNR
This unit is equipped with an automatic Dynamic Noise Reduction system.
DNR@reducesbackground hiss on AM and FM radio broadcasts,as well as
on cassette tapes.
@
DNR@is a registered trademark
of National Semiconductor Corporation.
To Play A Cassette
Your tape playeris built to worK Pesr with tapes that are30 to 45 minutes
long on each side. Tapes longer than that
are so thin they may not work well
in this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the upper
and lower knobs for volume, balance
and fade,just as you dofor the radio. The arrows indicate which side
of the
tape is being played.
Fast Forward
Press the button with thearrow pointing in the same direction that the tape
is playing.The arrow light next tothe arrow button will belit. To stop fast
forward, pressthe STOP-E JECTbutton.
Reverse
Press the button with the arrow pointingin the opposite direction that the
tape is playing.The arrow light next to the arrow button will lit.
be To stop
reverse, pressthe STOP-EJECT button.
SEARCH
Press theSEARCH button.
Press FWR to go to the beginningof the next selection.
Press REV and the tape will reverse to the beginning
of the current
selection.
Cr02
The Cr02 button lets you set the systemfor the type of cassette being used.
If you are using chrome or metal tapes, push the
CrO2 button in.
PROGRAM
To change sidesof the tape, press thePWR-VOL-PROG-RCL knob.
STOP-E JECT
To stop playing a tape, fully press this button (the cassette be
will
partially
ejected, andthe radio will begin playing).
Care of Your Cassette Tape PIayer
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly
is subject to reduced sound
quality, ruining the cassette, ora damaging the mechanism. Tape cassettes
that are not properly stored in their plastic cases away from contaminants,
direct sunlight, and extreme heat
may not operate properly and could cause
premature failureof the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned monthlyor with every 15 hours of use,
as regular maintenance. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
good cassette to see
if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If the second
cassette results inno improvement in sound quality, try cleaning the tape
player.
Proper tape player cleaning should be done with
a
wiping-action
non-abrasive cleaner cassette. To properly clean your tape player, you
should follow the directions on the cleaning cassette.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time.
Always verify that the cassette tape is in good condition before obtaining
service on your tape player.
3-16
How to Operate Your ET@ AM-FM Stereo Audio
Compact Disc(CD) System
This part tellsyou how your ETR@AM-FM stereo system works:
Upper Knob (PWR-VOL)
The upper knob has three functions:
0
It switches the radio on and off when the ignition is on.
0
It controls the volume.Volume will increase when the RCL knob is
turned to the right and decrease when turnedthe
to left. Volume will be
displayed briefly unlessLeftIRight speaker control,Rearmront speaker
control, BASS or TREB are adjusted.
0
It controls the mutefeature. By pressing the MUTE knob, all sound
from the radio or CD player stops. By pressing the knobagain, or by
turning the VOL knob to the right, sound will begin again.
Lefmght Speaker Control
The control ring behind the upper knob allows you to balance the sound
between the left and right speakers. Balance will be displayed briefly
when
using this control.
Lower Knob
The lower knob has two functions:
0 It enables you to tune in different radio stations by turning the knob to
the right or to the left.
0 It enables you to alternate betweenAM and FM stations by pressing the
BAND knob. Your selection will be briefly displayed.
Rearmront Speaker Control
The control ring behindthe lower knob fades the sound between your rear
and front speakers. Fade levels will be briefly displayed.
3-17
SEEK
Pressing the SEEK
static
and
stop.
button will cause the receiver to seek the next higher
Pressing the 4 SEEK button will cause the receiver to seek the next lower
station and stop.
SCAN
When you pressSCAN, the radio willgo to the next station and
pause, and
will keep scanning until you press
SCAN again. SC will be displayed when
using this control.
Pushbuttons
The five pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. They are also used
when you play a disc. (See “To Play A Compact Disc”.)
To set the pushbuttons for up to tenfavorite stations (5 AM and 5 FM):
Tune in the desired station.
Push the SET button. (SET is displayed briefly.)
Within 5 seconds, push oneof the five pushbuttons to store thestation.
Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return.
Clock
To set the clock,just:
Press the SET button. The radio may be on or off.
Within 5 seconds, press and hold either SEEK to increase the
minutes or 4 SEEK to decrease the minutes until the correct minute
appears on the display.
Press and holdSCAN until the correct hour appears on the display.
RCL
Press the RCL button to alternate between time and radio station
on the
display. RCL may be pressed when the ignitionis off to see the time.
BASS
Press theBASSI to increase the bass tonesand BASS to decrease bass
tones. Press the center
of the controlfor a preset BASS position. The bass
level will be displayed briefly when using this control.
v
..
- \
R’-,
TREBLE
Press the TREBA to increase the treble tones and TREB to decrease the
treble tones. Press the centerof the control for a preset TREB position. The
treble level will be displayed briefly when using this control.
v
3-18
1
To PIay A Compact Disc (CD)
NOTI( ::
I
Before you Degin, please note: DO NOTuse mini-discs that are
called singles. They won’t eject. USE FULL-SIZE COMPACT
DISCS.
If the disc playeris very hot, or if you’re driving on very
a rough
road, a disc maycome out or just not
play. If you see the word
HOT on thedisplay, the disc playeris too hot toplay the disc.
go off the display. When
Press RCL to make the word HOT
play again. Press
things get back to normal, the disc should
PWR to turn the
system on.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pullit in.
Wait a few seconds andthe disc should play.
If the disc comes back out, check whether:
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched, or wet.
0
Too much moisturei s in the air. (If thereis, wait about one hour and try
again.)
RCL
Press RCL to see what trackis playing. Pressit again within 5 seconds to
see how long it has been playing.The track number also appears when you
change the volume or when
a new track starts to play.
COMP
Press theCOMP button to make soft and loud passages more nearly equal
in volume. COMP appears inthe display while using this command.
RDM
The RDM button means random and when it is pressed, it causes CD
the
mechanism to play the tracks in
a random order rather than in the sequential
1,2, 3 order.
REV
Press and hold the REV button to quickly returnto a favorite passage. The
counter reading will be displayed when using this control.
FWD
Press and hold theFWD button to advance quickly withina track. Releaseit
to resume playing. Watch the display to stopaatspecific passage.
SCAN
Press SCAN to sample each trackfor approximately 10 seconds. Scanning
will continue until theRDM, SCANor any other motion buttonis pressed
again.
PREV
If you hold thePREV (4 SEEK) button, or press it more than once,
the
disc will return to previous tracks.
NEXT
Press NEXT (SEEKb)to hear the next track now instead
of waiting until
the present track is finished.
If you hold this button or press
it more than
once, the disc will advance further.
ST-PL
Press ST-PL (Stop-Play) to make the disc stop andthe radio play. Press
ST-PL again to restart the disc at the point where
it stopped.
Press PWR or turn the ignition key off to stop the disc player.
The disc
stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.
Press EJCT to eject the disc and make the radio play.
The disc will start at
track 1 when you reinsert it.
Anti-Theft Feature
Delco LOC 11’ is an Anti-Theft feature for the compact disc player.
It can
be used or ignored. If ignored,
the.system plays normally. Ifit is used, your
player won’t be usableif it is ever stolen, because
it won’t turn on.
The instructions below tell you how to enter a secret code into the system. If
your car loses battery powerfor any reason, you must unlock the system
with the secret code before the radio will turn on.
To Lock The System:
1. Write down any6 digit number and keepit in a safe place.
2. Turn the ignition to theACC (Accessory) or RUNposition.
3. Press the PWR button to turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until“- - -” shows
on the display.
You are now ready to enter your- ;ret code. Don’t wait morethan 15
seconds between steps.
5. rress SET and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press the SEEK b or 4 button to make thefirst number appear.
7. Press SCAN to make thelast two numbers agree with your code.
I.- ......
3-20
t-
8, Press BAND and 000 will appear again.Now you are ready to enter the
last three digitsof your code.
9. Repeat steps 6 and7 for the last three digits of your code.
10. Press BAND and rEP will appear for 5 seconds and then000 will
appear.
11. Repeat steps 6 through10. This time SEC will appear-indicating that
the radio is secure.
To Unlock The System After
A Fower Loss
When battery poweris reapplied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on
and LOC will appearon the display.
Enter your secret code as follows: pause no more than
15 seconds between
steps.
1. Turn the ignition on. (Radio off .)
2. Depress the SET button. The display will show 009.
3. Enter the six digits of the codefollowing steps 6-9 above. The display
will show the numbers as entered.
4. Depress theBAND knob and thetime appears - indicating thatthe
disabling sequence was successful.
If the display indicatesSEC, the
numbers did not match and the unitis still secured.
Disabling The Theft System
1. Depress presets 1 and 4 f?r 5 seconds with ignition on and radio power
off. The display will showSEC, indicating the unitis in the secure
mode.
2. Depress the SET button. The display will show000.
3. Enter thefirst three digits of the code following steps6 and 7 of the
preceding paragraphs.The display will show the numbersas entered.
4. Depress the BAND knob. The radio will display 000.
5. Enter the second three digitsof the code. The display will L-- JW the
numbers as entered.
6. Depress theBAND knob. If the display shows“- - - ”, the disabling
sequence was successful.The numbers matched the user-selected code
or the factory back-up code, and the unit
is in the UNSECURED mode.
If the display shows SEC, the disabling sequence was unsuccessful and
the numbers did not matcheither of the codes andthe unit will remain
in the SECURED mode.
3-21
Care of Your CompactDiscs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust.
If the surfaceof a disc is
soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure neverta touch the signalsurface when handling discs.Pick up discs
by graspingthe outer edges orthe edge of the. hole and the outer
edge.
Fixed Masf Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most
c,ar washes without being
damaged. If the mast should ever become sli,ghtly bent, you can straighten it
out by band.If the mast is badly bent, as
it might be by' vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the ismast
still tightened tothe
fender.
Your Driving and the Road
Section
.
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds
of roads and in
varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful
tips on
driving.
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Drunken Driving
...........................
:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Control of a Vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Steering Tips ............................................
4-8
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Driving Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Off-Road Driving With Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
DrivingatNight ...........................................
4-25
4-26
Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CityDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
FreewayDriving ..........................................
4-29
Hill and Mountain Roads ....................................
4-31
WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
Braking
Recreational Vehicle Towing (Four-wheel Drive Only)
. . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
TowingaTrailer ...........................................
4-1
4-38
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively,
Please start with avery important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up.
(See “Safety Belts”in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready
for anything.” On city streets,
rural roads, or freeways,
it means “always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready
for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they
are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive
driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving.
You never know whenthe
vehicle in front of you is going to brakeor turn suddenly.
Drunken Driving
1
-
:c.
1
--
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy.
It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year. Alcohol takes away three things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
,.. -
-, .
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Police records showmar almost halfof all motor vehicle-related deaths
involve alcohol - a driver,a passenger or someone else, such as a
pedestrian, had been drinking. In most cases, these deaths are the result
of
someone who was drinking and driving. About
20,000 motor
vehicle-related deaths occur each year because of alcohol, and thousands01
people are injured.
Just how much alcohol is too much if a person plans to drive? Ideally, no
one should drink alcohol and then drive. But
if one does, then what’s“too
much”? It can be a lot less than many might think. Although
it depends on
each person and situation, here
is some.genera1 informationon the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Content (BAC)
of someone who is drinking depends
upon four things:
How much alcohol is in the drink.
0
The drinker’s body weight.
The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking.
The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.
4-2
According to the American Medical Association, a 180-pound (82kg)
person who drinks three 12-ounce (355m
l)bottles of beer in an hour will
end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same
BAC by drinking three &ounce (120
ml) glasses of wine or three mixed
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquorlike whiskey, gin or
vodka.
It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example,
if the s u e person
drank three double martinis (3 ounces 90
orml of liquor each) within an
hour, the person’s BAC would be close 0.12
to percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a slightly lower
BAC level.
I
The law in most U.S. states setsthe legal limit ata BAC of 0.10 percent. In
Canada the limit is0.08 percent, andin some other countries it’s lower than
that. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one
hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,
it depends on how much alcohol isin the
drinks, and how quicklythe person drinks them.
4-3
“I’ll be carehl” isn’t the right answer. What
if there’s an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
P ~ ~A
S Owith
S
a
bgher BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking-and driving that many people don’t
know. Medical research shows that alcohol
in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse. That’s especially true
for brain, spinal cord and heart
injuries. That means that
if anyone who has been drinking
-driver or
passenger -is in a crash, the chance
of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if that person had not been drinking. And we’ve
already seen that the chance
of a crash itselfis higher for drinking drivers.
.~
4-4
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go.
They arethe brakes, the steering and the accelerator.
All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or
ice, it’s easy to ask more of
those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Thatmeans you
can lose control of your vehicle.
Braking
I
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts
-heavy
acceleration followed by heavy braking
- rather than keeping pace with
traffic. This is a mistake.Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops.Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do
lot of
a heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot
of unnecessary braking. That means better
braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t
pump your brakes.If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down.
If
your engine stops,you will still have some power brake assist. But you
will
use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up,
it may takelonger
to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has an advanced electronic braking system that can help you
keep it under control.
If your vehicle has an anti-lock brake system warning light on the
instrument panel,it has four-wheel anti-lock brakes. Otherwise, it has
rear-wheel anti-lock brakes. When you start a vehicle that has four-wheel
anti-lock brakes and begin to drive away, you may hear
a momentary motor
or clicking noise. This is the
ABS system testing itself.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely.
Suddenly an animaljumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. With four-wheel
anti-lock: If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
and at the rear wheels.The
separately work the brakes at each front wheel
four-wheel anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any
1
4-6
driver could. With rear-wheel anti-lock: Ifone of the rear wheelsis about
to stop rolling, the computer will workthe brakes at the rear wheels. The
computer is programmed to make the most
of available tire and road
conditions.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and
controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up
to the brake pedal.If you get too close to the vehicle in front
of you, you
won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows
or
stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
To Use Four-wheel Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes.
Just hold the brake pedal down and
let anti-lock
work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate. or you may notice some
noise, but this is 1 mal.
To Use Rear-Wheel Anti-Lock
Use rear-wheel anti-lock like regular brakes. You may feel the brakes
vibrate, or you may notice some noise outside your vehicle,this
butis
normal. Let anti-lock workfor you, but remember: Your Eront wheelscan
still stop rolling. If that happens, release enough pressure on the brakes to
get the wheels rolling again
so that you can steer.
With the four-wheel drive option, you won’t have rear-wheel anti-lock
braking when you shift into four-wheel drive. But you will have regular
braking. When you shift back into two-wheel drive, you will have
rear-wheel anti-lock again.
4-7
t
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation that requires hard
braking.
The four-wheel anti-lock system lets you steer and brakeat the same time.
If you have the rear-wheel anti-lock braking system, your front wheels can
stop rolling when you brake very hard. Once they do, the vehicle can’t
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry
it in whatever directionit
was headed when the front wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the
road, into the very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
So, unless you have four-wheel anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while maintaining steering
control. You do this by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure. When you do, it will help maintain steering control. In many
emergencies, steering can help
you more than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops
or the system is
not functioning,you can steer butit will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take eurves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “drrver lost control” accidents mentiton curves. Here’s why:
~~- -- - -~
-1-3 news
happen
bxperienced driver or beginner, each
of us is subject to the same laws
of
physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road
surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will
keep the vehicle goingin
the same direction.If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet you’ll
ice,
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition
of your tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you’rein a curve, speedis the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then
you suddenly apply
the brakes. Both control systems- steering and braking- have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock
brakes, adding the hard braking can demand too much
of those places.You
can lose control.
4 -8
I
The same thing can happen if you’re steering througha sharp curve and you
suddenly accelerate.Those two control systems - steering and acceleration
-can overwhelm those places where
the tires meet the road and make vou
lose control.
What should you do
if this ever happens? Ease up on the brake
or
accelerator pedal, steerthe vehicle the way you wantit~togo, and slow
down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed.
Of
course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you’ll wantto go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed
as you approach a curve, do
it before you
enter the curve, while yourfront wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you areofout
the curve,
and then accelerate gentlyinto the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than braking.
For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car
suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops rightin front of you. You can avoid these problems by
braking - if you can stopin time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t
room. That’sthe time for evasive action- steering around the problem.
Your Vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply
your brakes-but, unless you have four-wheel anti-lock, not enough to
lock your front wheels.It is better to remove as much speed as you can from
a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, toleft
theor right
depending on the space available.
An emergencylike this requires close attention and a quick decision.
If you
are holding the steering wheel the
at recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turnit a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to fast,
act steer quickly, andjust as quickly
straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.
4-9
The fact that such emergenoy situations are always possible
is a good reason
to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edge
of
a road ontothe shoulder while you're driving.
If the levelof the shoulderis only slightly below the pavement, recovery
should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in
the way, steerso that yourvebcle straddles the edgeof the pavement.You
can turn th'e steering wheel toup1/4 turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. TheqQgqyour steering wheelto go straight down the
roadway.
1. Edge of Road
Surface
2. SlowDown
3. Left Approx.
Quarter Turn
4. Recover
So here are Some tips for passing:
e
e
e
e
e
4-11
Check your rnlrro , glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane
change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you
are far enough aheadof the passed vehicle to see
its front in your inside
mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the
right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The
vehicle youjust passed may seem to be farther away from you it
than
really is.)
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads.
Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though
the
brake lights are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, makeit easy for the following driver to get
ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of 0 mo/
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three
control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough
friction where the tires meet the road do
to what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek
an
escape route or area
of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can
lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three typesof skids correspond to your Vehicle’s three control systems.
In the braking skid your wheels aren’t rolling.
In the steering or cornering
skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose
comering force. And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the
driving wheels to spin.
.
L.
A cornering skid andan acceleration skid are best handled
by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your
foot off the accelerator pedal and
quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering
quickly enough, your vehicle
may straighten out. Always be readyfor a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your
driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance
will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
4-12
F.
”
While driving on a surrace with reaucea traction, try yo best to a td
sudden steering, acceleration, or braking (including engme braking
DY
shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues- such as enough water,
ice or packed
snow on the road tomake a “mirrored surface”- and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: If you have the four-wheel anti-lock braking system, it helps
avoid only the braking skid.
The rear-wheel anti-lock braking system helps
avoid only a rear braking skid. In a braking skid (where front
the wheels are
no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the brakes to get front
the
wheels rolling again. This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal
down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long
as the front wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
Driving Guidelines
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-wheel
Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti-lock Brakes’’ in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you shouldn’t drive off-road
unless you’re on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun.But it does have some definite hazards.
The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American road system
behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In short,
you’ve gone right backto nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s why it’s very
important that you readthis guide. You’llfind many driving tips and
suggestions. These will help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before
you go out. For example, be sure to have
all necessary maintenance and service work done.
Be sure you read all the
information about your four-wheel drive vehicle in this manual. Is there
enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where
they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you
be on someone’s private land?If
so, be sure to getthe necessary permission.
4-13
Loading Your Vehide for Off-Road Rriving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your
vehicle.
The heaviest things should be onthe load floor and forwardof your
rear axle. Put heavier items as
far forward as youcm.
Be surethe load is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain
doesn’t toss things around.
You’ll find other important information in this manual. “See
Vehicle
Loading,” and “Tires” in the Index.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area.
Know the terrain and plan your route. Youare much less likely to get bad
surprises. Get accurate maps
of trails and terrain.Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle.
If something
happens to oneof them, the other can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch?If so, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy
if you get stuck.But
you’ll want to know how to use
it properly.
Ge.tting Familiar withOff-Road Driving
It’s a goodidea to practice in an area that’s safe and close to home before
you go into the wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new and
different drivingskills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds
of signals. Your eyes, for example, need
to constantly sweepthe terrain for unexpected obstacles.Your ears need to
listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your
arms, hands, feet, and
body you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
control ling^ your vehicleis the keyto successful off-road driving. Oneof
the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some
things to keepin mind. At higher speeds:
you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain
for
obstacles.
you have less time to react.
0
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles.
0
you’ll need more distancefor braking, especially since you’re on an
unpaved surface.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-rdad driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You
need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. are
Here
some things to consider.
Sufface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow ice.
or Each of these surfaces affects
the steering, acceleration, and braking
of your vehicle in different ways.
Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and
longer braking distances.
4- 15
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous.
A rock,
log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you’re not preparedfor them. Often
these obstacles are hidden
by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and
fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
Is the path ahead clear?
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s more discussion
of these subjects later.)
Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the
steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can
jerk the wheel
out of your hands if you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can
leave the ground.If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can’t
control the vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will beon an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to
avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns,or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind
of alertness from driving
on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits
or signal lights.You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe
and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And isthis
certainly truefor off-road driving. At the very time you need special
alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amountof alcohol. You could have a serious-or
even fatal- accident if you drink and driveor ride with a driver who has
been drinking. (See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.)
1
4-16.
Driving On Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across
hill.
a Driving safely
on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle
can and can’tdo. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no matter
how well built the vehicle.
Approachiing a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need
to decide if it’s one of those hills that’s
just too steepto climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard
judge.
to
On a very small hill,for example, there may be
a smooth, constant incline
with only a small change
in elevation where you can easily see the
all way
to thetop. On a largehill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top,
but you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes,
grass, or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill.
0
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill
get sharply steeper in places?
Is there good traction on the hillside, orwill the surface cause tire
slipping?
Is there a straight path up or down
the hill so you won’t have to make
turning maneuvers?
Are there obstructions onthe hill that can block your path (boulders,
trees, logs orruts)?
What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop-off, a
fence? Get out and walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s
the smart way
to find out.
0
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs
and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects
of
erosion.
4 - 1.7
~
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some
special steps.
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don’t use
more power than you need, because you don’t want your wheels
to start
spinning or sliding.
Try to drive straight up the hill
if at all possible.If the path twists and
turns, you might want to find another route.
Ease up on your speed as you approachthe top of the hill.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make
you more visible to approaching
traffic on trails or hills.
Sound the horn as you approach the top
of the hill to let opposing
traffic know you’re there.
Use your headlights even during the day. They make you more visible
to oncoming traffic.
..
4- 18
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and
I
can’t make it up the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are
some things you must not do.
First, here’s what youshould do:
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling
backwards. Also, applythe parking brake.
If your engineis still running, shift the transmission into reverse,
release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in reverse.
If your enginehas stopped running, you’ll need to restart
it. With the
brake pedal depressed and theparking brake still applied, shift the
transmission to“P” (Park) (or, shift to “N” (Neutral) if your vehicle has
a manual transmission) and restart the engine. Then, shift to reverse,
release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight
as
possible in reverse.
0
As you are backing down the hill, put yourleft hand on the steering
wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell
if your
wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather thantheinleft or
right direction. Turning the wheel too
far to the left or right will
increase the possibilityof a rollover.
Here are some things youmust not do if you stall, or are aboutto stall,
when going up a hill.
0
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into“ N ’ (Neutral) (or
depressing theclutch, if you have a manual transmission) to “rev-up”
the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work.
Your
vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could goofout
control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the
parking brake.Shift into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly
back straight down.
0
Never attempt to turn around
if you are about to stall when going up a
hill. If the hillis steep enoughto stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to
cause youto roll over if you turn around.If you can’t makeit up the
hill, you must backstraight down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling,I try
toback down the hin and decide
I just
can’t do it. What shouldI do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission
in “ P ’ (Park) (or the
manual transmission in first gear), and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay of
clear
the path the vehicle would takeitifrolled downhill.Do not shift the
it in
transfer case to“ N ’ (Neutral) when you leave the vehicle. Leave
some gear.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of
things:
How steep is the downhill? WillI be able to maintain vehiclecontrol?
0
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packeddirt?
Gravel?
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders?
What’s at the bottom of thehill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a
river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then
try to keep your vehicle
headed straight down, and use a low gear. way,
This engine dragcan help
your brakes and they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
4-20
Q : Are ;theresome things I should not,do when driving .downa hiIl?
A : Yes! These are important becauseif you ignore them you could lase
control andhave a serious accident.
Shift to “P’ (Park) (or to Neutral with the manual transmission) and,
while still braking, restart the engine.
Shift back toa low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight
down.
If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
4-21
Driving Acrossan Incline
Sooner or later,an off-road trail will probably go across the incline
of a hill.
If this happens, youhave to decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
(I,
A hill thatcan be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive
across. When yougo straight up or down a hill, the length
of the wheel
base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the
likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive
across an incline, the much morenmow track width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle
from
tilting and rolling over.Also, drivirig across an indline puts more
weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause
downhil
a
slide or a
rollover.
0
Surface conditions can bea problem when you drive across a hill.
Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to
slip sideways, downhill.If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit
something that will tripit (a rock,a rut, etc.) and roll over.
0
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness
of the incline even worse.I€
you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill
wheels dropinto a rutor depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these,
you need to decide carefully whether
to try to drive
across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean
you have to drive
it. The last vehicle to
try it might have rolled over.
Q:
What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too steep, Ibut
hit
some loose gravel and start to slide dowhhill.
What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This
should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping.
However, a much better way to prevent
h s is to get out and “walk the
course” so you know what the surfaceis like before you driveit.
4-22
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossingan incline, be sure you (and your
passengers) getout on the uphill side, even
if the door there is harder to
open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over,
you’ll be rightin its path.
If you have to walk down
the slope, stay outof the paththe vehicle will take
if it does roll over.
Driving In Mud, Sand, Snow, Or Ice
When you drivein mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t get good traction.
You can’t accelerate as quickly, turning
is more difficult, and you’ll need
longer braking distances.
It’s best to usea low gear when you’rein mud - the deeper the mud, the
lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving
so you don’t get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense
a change in wheel traction. Butit will
depend upon how loosely packed the sand
is. On loosely packed sand (as on
beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an
effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.
You may want to reduce the air
pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. This will improve
traction.
4-23
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction. On these surfaces,
it’s very easy tolase control. On wet ice, for example, the tractionso
ispoor
that you will have difficulty accelerating. And
if you do get moving, poor
steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide ofout
control.
Driving In Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. But heavy rain can
mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution.
Find out haw deep the water
is before you drive through it. If it’s deep
enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, don’t
try it - you
probably won’t get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and
other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly. At fast speeds, water
splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is
under water, you’ll never be able to start your engine. When you go through
water, rememberthat when vour brakes get wet,it mav take you longer to
stop.
..
C
.
4-24
I
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis
or
under the hood.These accumulations can be fire
a hazard.
After operation in mudor sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked.
These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body
structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
for
damage. Also, checkthe fuel lines and cooling systemfor any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer
to the Maintenance Schedule booklet
for additional information.
Driving at Night
Night drivingis more dangerous than day driving.0ne reason is that some
drivers are likely to be impaired
-by alcohol ordrugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from n d l i g h t s
behind you.
0
Since you can’t seeas well, you may need to slow down and keep more
space between you and other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your headlights can light
up only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pulloff the road in asafe place and rest.
4-25
Night Vision
I
--
I’
No one can see as well at night as the
in daytime. But as we get older these
differences increase. A50-year4d driver may require atleast twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as20-year-old.
a
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example,
if you spendthe day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.
Your eyes will haveless trouble adjusting to night. But
if you’re driving,
don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onfrom
glare
headlights, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching lights.
It can take a second
or two,or even several seconds,for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high
beam, or a vehicle with misaimed headlights), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching lights.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean
-inside and
out. Glare at night
is made much worse by dirt onthe glass. Eventhe inside
of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights
dazzle and flash more than clean .glass would, making the pupils
of your
eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlights light up
far less of a roadway when youare
in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out
dimly lighted objects. Just
as your headlights should be checked regularly
for proper aim,so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers
suffer from night blindness
-the inability to see in dim light
- and aren’t
even awareof it.
Driving inthe Rain
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road you can’t stop,
accelerate orturn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as goodas
on dry roads. And,if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even
4-26
less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious
if rain starts to
fall while you are driving.The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tunedfor driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain,the harder it is tosee. Even if your windshield wiper
blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make
it harder to see road signs
and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge
of the road, and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your
windshield washer tankfilled. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when
they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separatefrom the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some
car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes.Try
to avoid puddles.But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous.So much water can build up under your tires
that they can actuallyride on the water. This can happen if the roadwet
is
enough and you’re going
fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
4-27
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can
if your tires haven’t much
tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen
if a lot of water
is standingon the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there
could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and
fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice
is to slow down whenit is
raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
Turn on your low-beam headlights -not just your parking lights- to
help make you more visible to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be
especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more
clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road
spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
I
One of the biggest problems with city streets the
is amount of traffic on
them. You’ll wantto watch outfor what the other drivers are doing and pay
attention to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safetyin city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and
plan your trip into an unknown part
of the cityjust as you wouldfor a
cross-country trip.
4-28
E
Try to use the freeways thatrim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll
save time and energy. (See
the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a greenlight as a warning signal.A traffic lightis there because
the corner is busy enough to needit. When a light turns green, and
just
before you start to move, check both ways
for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.
Freeway Driving
Mile formile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways,
tumplkes, or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their
own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep up withtraffic and
keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance there is usually a ramp that to
leads
the freeway. If you have
a clear viewof the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend
with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your
shoulder as often as necessary. Tryto blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are onthe freeway, adjustyour speed to the postedlimit or to the
prevailing rateif it’s slower. Stayin the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make
sure thereisn’t another vehiclein your “blind” spot.
4-29
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow
a reasonable
following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want toleave the freeway, move to the proper lane well
in
advance. If you miss your exitdo not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of
motion. After drivingfor any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to
think you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you’re
not fresh - such as after a day’s work
- don’t plan to make too many
miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you
can easily drivein.
Is your vehicle readyfor a longtrip? If you keepit serviced and maintained,
it’s ready to go. Ifit needs service, haveit done before starting out.Of
course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in Vehicle
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if
you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid:Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean
inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?
Lights: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread
good enoughfor long-distance driving? Arethe tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route?
Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-30
High way Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is itjust plain
falling asleepat the wheel? Callit highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch
of road with the same scenery,
along with thehum of the tires on the road,
the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind againstthe vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’tit let
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road less
in than a
second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First,be aware thatit can
happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, with a comfortablycool
interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check
your mirrors and your instruments frequently.
0
If you get sleepy, pulloff the road into a rest, service, or parking area
and take a nap,get some exercise,or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highwayas an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving onsteep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or
rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly insteep country, or if you’re planning to visit there,
here are some tips that
can make yourtrips safer and more enjoyable. (See
“Off-Road Driving” in the Indexfor information about driving off-road.)
4-31
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and
also the
brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work
hard on mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important thing
to know is this:
let your enginedo some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear
when you go down a steep or long hill.
Know how togo uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear.
The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads
in hills or
mountains. Don’t swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive
at speeds thatlet you stay in your own lane.
As you .go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in
your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special
problems. Examples are long grades, passingno-passing
or
zones, a
falling- rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4 -3.2
1
t
Winter Driving
Here are some tipsfor winter driving:
Have your vehiclein good shapefor winter. Be sure your engine coolant
mix is correct.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield
a flashlight,
washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel,
a redcloth, and a coupleof reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small of
bagsand, a pieceof old
carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving onSnow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have
good traction.
However, if thereis snow orice between your tires andthe road, you can
have a very slippery situation. You’ll havelot
a less traction or “grip” and
will need to be very careful.
4-33
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snowor ice can be
slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because
it
may offer the least tractionof all. You can get “wet ice” when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0 O C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow
drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even
more.
L
Your anti-lock brakes improve your ability to make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
See
“Anti-lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
0
Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot
that’s covered withice. On an otherwise clear road,ice patches may
appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps
of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface
of a
curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are
clear. If you see a patchof ice ahead of you, brake before you are on
it.
Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-34
1
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you couldinbea serious situation.You
should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know
for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here
are some things to do
to s m o n help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: Turn
an your
hazard flashers. Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve
been stopped bythe snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you haveno blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators
from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats
- anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can runthe engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-35
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run
the engine, makeit go a littlefaster than just idle. Thatis, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel
for the heat that you get and
it keeps
the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restartthe
vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlights.Let the
heater runfor awhile.
Then, shutthe engine off and close the window almost all the way to
preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when
feelyou
really uncomfortable from the cold. But
do it as little as possible. Preserve
the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
of out
the
vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hoursoor
until
help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
(Four- Wheel Drive Only)
If your vehicle has &wheel drive, you may tow
it behind another vehicle
providing it does not have the optional electronic shift transfer case.
NOTICE:
Recreational vehicle towingis not recommended for vehicles
with the optional electronic shift transfer case because the
electronic shift has no neutral position.
4-36
Before towing, you should:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the automatic transmissionin “ P ’ (Park) or the manual
transmission in the lowest gear(1 st gear).
3. Firmly attach the vehicle being towed tothe tow vehicle. Refer tothe
hitch manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Place the transfer case shiftlever in “ N ’ (Neutral).
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly
attached tothe tow vehicle.
6. Insert the ignition keyinto the ignition switch and turn
it one notch
forward of the LOCK position. This places the key intothe OFF
po.sition, which unlocksthe steering column while preventing battery
drain. Unlocking the steering columnwill allow for proper movement
of the front wheelshires during towing.
I NOTICE:
I You should exercise extra care whenevertowing another vehicle.
4-37
Towing a Trailer
NOTI.CE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not coveredby your warranty.
To pull a trailer
correctIy, follow the advicein this section, andsee your dealer
for important information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
Every vehicle is readyfor some trailer towing.If it was built with trailering
options, as many are, it’s ready
for heavier trailers. But trailering
is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in
handling, durability, andfuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, andit has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In it are many time-tested, important
trailering tips and safety rules. Many
of these are importantfor your safety
and thatof your passengers.So please read this section carefully before you
pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here qre some important points.
There are many different laws having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be
driving. A good sourcefor this information can be state or provincial
police.
Consider using a sway controlif your trailer will weigh2,000 pounds
(900 kg) or less. You should alwaysuse a sway controlif your trailer
will weigh more than2,000 pounds (900 kg).
You can ask a hitch dealer about sway
controls.
0
Don’t tow a trailer at aU during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new
vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or otherparts could be damaged.
Then, during thefist 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t
drive over 50 mph (80 kmk)and don’t make starts atfull throttle. This
helps your engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear inat the heavier
loads.
Three important considerations have da
to with weight:
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy cana .trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude,
road grades, outside temperature andhow much your vehicleis used to pull
a trailer are all important. And,it can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice,
or you can
write usat the address listedin your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to General Motors
of Canada Limited, Customer
Assistance Center, 1908 Colonel Sam Drive, Oshawa, Ontario
L1H 8P7.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A)
of any trailer is an important weight to measure
because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The gross vehicle
weight (GVW)includes the curb weightof the vehicle, any cargo you may
carry in it, and the people whowill be riding in the vehicle. Andif you will
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight,
too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the
Index for more infomation about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-39
A
B
If you’re using a “dead-weight” hitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh
10% of the total loaded trailer weight(B). If you have a
“weight-distributing” hitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 12%of the
total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are proper.If they aren’t, you may be able to
get them right simplyby moving some items aroundin the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the lirnit
for cold tires. You’ll find
these numbers on the Certification label on the driver’s door lock pillar
or
see “Tire Loading”in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over GVW
the
limit for your vehicle.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than
2,000 pounds (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted,
weight-distributing hitch and sway controlof the proper size. This
equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
NOTlCE:
If your vehicle has the bumper delete option, do not bolt any
type of hitch to the close-out panel. The close-out panel will not
support a hitch.
4-40
You can tow trailers to2,000 pounds (900 kg) with a step bumper hitch, but
if your trailer tongue has V-shaped
a
foot, your bumper could be damaged
in sharp turns. Check the distance from front
the edge of the foot to the
middle of the hitch ball socket.If the distanceis less than 12 inches, take the
foot off the trailer tongue.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will
not drop to the roadif it becomes separatedfrom the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the
trailer manufacturer. Followthe manufacturer’s recommendationfor
attaching safety chains. Always leave
just enough slackso you can turn with
your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag
on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than
1,000 pounds (450 kg) loaded, then it needs
its own brakes-and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailerbE---:s so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Your trailer brakes system can tap
into vehicle’s hydraulicbrake system
except:
Don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system
if the trailer’s brake system will
use more than0.02 cubic inch( 0 . 3 ~ of
~ )fluid from your vehicle’s master
cylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t work well.
You could even
lose your brakes.
Will the trailer parts take3,000 psi (20 650 P a ) of pressure? If not, the
trailer brake system must not be used with your vehicle.
If everything checksout this far, then makethe brake fluid tap atthe port on
the master cylinder that sends
fluid to the rear brakes. Butdon’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally breakoff. Use steel brake
tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount
of experience. Before settingout
for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself
with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight
of the trailer.
And always keepin mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good
deal longer and not nearly
so responsive as your vehicle by
is itself.
Before you start, checkthe trailer hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector, lights, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the
4-41
trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets
you check your electricql connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theis load
secure, and
that the lights and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay atleast twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that
require heavy braking apd sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer.
And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then,
to move the
trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal.
Do this
so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn lane
or change. Properly hooked up,the
trailer lights will also flash, telling other drivers you’re to
about
turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash
€or turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned
out. Thus, you may think
drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
4-42
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start dawn a long or
steep downgrade.If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed
to around 45 mph
(70 km/h) to reduce the possibilityof engine and transmission overheating.
If you have an automatic transmission, you should use
“D” when towing a
trailer. Operating your vehicle
in “D” when towing a trailer will minimize
heat buildup and extend the
life of your transmission.Or, if you have a
rrianual transmission withfifth gear, it’s better not to use
fifth gear, just
drive in fourth gear (or,as you need to, a lower gear).
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a Ifhill.
something goes wrong, your
rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have
to park your rig on a hill, here’s how do
to it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’tshift into “P”(Park) yet,or into
gear for a manual transmission.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks arein place, release the regular brakes until the
chocks absorbthe load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and
then
shift into “P” (Park), or“R” (Reverse) for a manual transmission.
5. If you have a four-wheel drive vehicle with a manual transfer case shift
lever, be surethe transfer caseis in a drivegear-not in “N” (Neutral).
6. Release the parking brakes,
4-43
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on
a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while
you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the traileris clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
-
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re pulling a trailer.See
the Maintenance Schedulefor more on this. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system, and brake
adjustment. Eachof these is coveredin this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly.If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections beforeyou start your trip.
.
?
^-. .
“
C
Check periodically tosee that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Trailer Light Wiring
See “Trailer Wiring Harness”in the Index.
4-44
I
b
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power wlncnon your vehicle, only use
it when your
vehicle is stationary or anchored.
NOTICE:
When operating a power winch on your vehicle always leave the
Do not leave an automatic
transmission in the neutral position.
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in gear or the
transmission may be damaged.
Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake or block the wheels
to keep
your vehiclefrom rolling.
4-45
Notes
4 -4t
Problems on the Road
Section
.
Here you’ll find whatto do aboutsome problems that can occur on the road
.
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................................
5-2
......................................
Jump Starting ..............................................
Towing Your Vehicle ........................................
Engine Overheating ........................................
If a Tire Goes Flat .........................................
Changing a Flat Tire .......................................
If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow .....................
Other Warning Devices
5-1
5-3
5-3
5-8
5-12
5-20
5-20
5-34
Hazard Warning Flashers
1I
Your hazard warning
flashers let you warn
others. They also let
police know you have
a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal
lights will flash on
and off.
Press the button in to
make your front and
rear turn signal lights
flash on and off.Your
hazard warning
flashers work no
matter what position
your key is in, and
even if the key isn’t
in.
To turn off the
flashers, pullout on
the collar:
on, your turn signals won’t work.
When the hazard warning flashers are
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can
set one up at the sideof the road
ab.out 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some
jumper cables tostart your vehicle. But please follow the steps below
to do
it safely.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could resultcostly
in damage to your
vehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty.
Trying tostart yourvehicle by pushing or pulling it could
damage yourvehicle, even if you have a manual transmission.
And if you have an automatic transmission,won’t
it start that
way.
E
I
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery wlm a negauve
ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a negative
ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach, but be
sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other.
If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you don’t want.You wouldn’t be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
You could be injured if the vehicles
roll, Set the parking brakefirmly
on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in “P” (Park) or a
manual transmission in “ N ’ (Neutral). If you have a four-wheel drive
vehicle with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure the transfer case
is not in “ N ’ (Neutral).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all lights that aren’t
needed, and radios. This will avoid sparks and
help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
I NOTICE:
I
If you leave your radioon, it could be badly damaged. The
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive(+) and
negative (-) terminals on each battery.
I
5-4
5.
Check that thejumper cables don’t have looseor missing insulation.I€
they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could also be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should
h o w . Positive (+) will go to positive(+) and negative (-) will go to
negative (-) or SL metal engine part. Don’t. connect
(+) to (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too.
5-5
Battery
Dead
(+)
Good Battery (+)
7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+)
terminal of the good battery.
8. Now connect the black negative(-) cable to the good battery’s negative
(-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end
of the negative cabledoesn ’Igo to the dead battery.It goes to a heavy
unpainted metal part on the engineof the vehicle with the dead battery.
Good Battery (-)
Heavy Metal Engine Part
9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engineparts that move. The electrical connection is just as
good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much
less.
5-6
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine
for a
while.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few
tries, it probably needs service.
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take
care that they don’t touch each otk or anv other metal.
Remove Cables In This Order:
2
3
1. HeavyMetal
Engine Part
2. Good Battery (-)
3. Good Battery (+)
4. Dead Battery (+)
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have GM
a dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle.
They can provide the right equipment and know how toit tow
without
damage.
If your vehicle has been changed since
it was factory-new by adding things
like fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these things could
be damaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, or that
it has the four-wheel
drive option.
0
The make, model, and yearof your vehicle.
Whether you can move the shift lever
for the transmission and shiftthe
transfer case, if you have one.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
5-8
When your vehicleis being towed, have the ignition key off. The steering
wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position
with a clamping
device designed for towing service.Do not use the vehicle’s steering
column lock for this. The transmissi,on (either automatic or manual) should
be in “ N ’ (Neutral) andthe transfer case (eithermanual shift or electronic
shift), if you have one, should be
in 2 HI. The paking brake shouldbe
released.
5-9
Towing From fhe Front
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or front bumper
system
will be damaged.
Use wheellift or car-carrier equipment.
Additional ramping may be required for car-carrierequipment.
Use safety chainsand wheel straps.
If your vehicle has thefour-wheel drive option, adolly MUST be
used under the rearwheels when towing from the front.
5-19
Towing From the Rear
NOTICE:
Do not tow withsling-type equipment or rear bumper
system
will be damaged.
Use wheellift or car-carrier equipment.
:
. .A.
:
i
.
.
Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use safety chainsand wheel straps.
If your vehicle has the four-wheel drive option, a dolly MUST
be usedunder the frontwheels when towing fromthe rear.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on
the rear wheels, unless you have to.
If the
vehicle must be towed on the rear wheels, don’t go more35than
mph (56
km/h) or farther than 50 miles (80 km)or your transmission will be
damaged. If these limits mustbe exceeded, then the rear drive wheels have
to be supported on a dolly.
5-11
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument
panel.
If Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep driving no
with
coolant, your vehicle cdhbe badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
/f No Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine
If you get the overheat warning butsee or hear no steam, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get
a little too hot when you:
0
Climb a long hill ona hot day.
0
Stop after high speed driving.
0
Idle for long periods in traffic.
0
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign
of steam, try thisfor a minute
or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater tofull hot at the highest fan speed and open the
window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to “N” (Neutral).
If you no longer havethe overheat warning, you can drive.
Just to be safe,
drive slowerfor about ten minutes.If the warning doesn’t come back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no signof steam, push the accelerator until
the engine speed is
about twiceas fast as normal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to
normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see
if the warning stops.
But then,if you still have the warning, TURNOFF THE ENGINE AND
GET EVERYONE OUT OF THE VEHICLE untilit cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.
When you decide it’s
safe to lift the hood,
here’s what you’ll see:
A. Coolant recovery
tank
B. Radiator pressure
cap
C . Engine fan
If the coolantinside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything
else until it cools down.
5-13
The coolant level should be at or aboveADD
the mark. If it isn’t, you may
have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterorpump
somewhere else in the cooling system.
I NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t
covered by your warranty.
If there seems to beno leak, start the engine again.
See if the fan speed
increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn
off the engine.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at or above
the ADD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and
a proper antifreezeat the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in
the Indexfor more information aboutthe proper coolant mix.)
I NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeqe and crack the engine, radiator,
heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant.
When the coolantin the coolant recovery tank
is at or above the
ADD mark,
start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you canYou
try.
can add the proper coolant mix directly
to the radiator, but be sure the
cooling systemis cool before you do
it.
5-15
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system,
including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer
hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly to the
left until it first stops. (Don’t press
down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop.A hiss means thereis still some
pressure left.
2. Then keep
turning the
pressure cap, but
now push down
as you turnit.
Remove the
pressure cap.
3. Fill the radiator
with the proper
mix, up to the
base of the filler
neck.
4. Then fill the
coolant recovery
tank to theADD
mark.
5 . h t the cap back
on the coolant
recovery tank,
but leavethe
radiator pressure
cap off.
7. By this time thecoolant level inside thefiller neck may be lower. If the
level is lower, add more
of the proper mix through the filler neck until
the level reachesthe base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the
pressure cap.
At any time
during this
procedure if
coolant begins to
flow outof the
filler neck,
reinstall the
pressure cap. Be
sure the arrows
on pressure cap
line up like this.
P
' Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutchedengine cooling fan. Whenthe clutch is engaged,
the fan spinsfaster to provide more airto cool the engine. In most every day
driving conditions the clutchis not engaged. This improves fuel economy
and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or
high outside temperatures, thefan speed increases whenthe clutch engages.
So you may hear an increase in
fan noise. This is normal and should not be
mistaken as the transmission slippingor making extra shifts. It is merely the
cooling system functioning properly.
The fan will slow down when
additional coolingis not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when youstart the engine. It will go away
as thefan clutch disengages.
5-19
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusualfor a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially
if you
maintain your tires properly. If
air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to
leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” are
here
a few tips
about what to expect and what
to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot
off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firrnly. Steer to maintain lane position, then gently brake to a
stop well outof the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may
require the same correction you’d use in a skid.
In any rear blowout, remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. Itbemay
very bumpy and
noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well
off the road if
possible.
If a tire goesflat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to
change aflat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goesflat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a
level place. Turn on your hazard waming flashers.
5-20
Flat Tire
L Blocked Tire
The following steps will tell you how to usejack
the and change a tire.
Jack Storage
Your jack, wheel wrench and wheel blocks are stored behind front
the seats,
either onthe center wall (extended cab) or along the right wall (regular cab).
To remove yourjack
cover, if you have one,
turn the plastic wing
nut to theleft until
you can pullit out.
Remove thejack
cover.
To remove the wheel
blocks, jack and wheel
wrench, turn the wing
nut to the left. Pull the
wheel blocks,jack and
wheel wrench off.
5-21
7
Jacking Equipment Storage
1. Wheel Wrench
2. Bracket
3. Jacking InstructionsTag (Roll andplace tag behind the bracket after
the toolsare installed)
4. Bolt Location (Standard)
5. Bolt Location (ZR2)
6. Wheel Blocks
7. Nut
8. Rubber Band
9. Jack Position (ZR2)
10. Jack Position (Standard)
Jacking Storage Cover
1. Hub Cap Removal Tool
2. Cover (Extended Cab)
3. Cover (Standard Cab)
4. Hub Cap Removal Tool
5. Bolt
oval tool if provided.
NOTE: Restore cover and hub cap rem
Spare Tire
Your spare tire is
stored underneath the
rear of your vehicle.
5-23
Underbody Carrier
NOTICE:
Never remove or restow a tirefrom/to a stowage position under
the vehicle whilethe vehicle is supported by a jack.Always
tighten the tirefully against the undersideof the vehicle when
restowing.
I
5
Underbody Spare Tire Mounting
1. WheelWrench
2. Hoist Assembly
3. Retainer
4. Spring
5. Tire
6. Valve Stem (Pointed Down)
NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drivevehicle before cable
is restored.
5-24
I
To Remove the Spare Tire
Insert the chisel end
of
the wheel wrench,on
an angle, into the hole
in the rear bumper. Be
sure the chisel end
of
the wheel wrench
connects into the hoist
shaft.
Turn the wheel
wrench to theleft to
lower the spare tire.
Keep turning the
wheel wrench until the
spare tire can be
pulled out from under
the vehicle.
When thetire has
been completely
lowered, tilt the
retainer at the endof
the cable and pullit
through the wheel
opening. Pull thetire
out from under the
vehicle.
5-25
Changing the Tire
Start with thejack,
wheel wrench and
wheel blocks.
Rotate thejackhandle
to the right. That will
raise the jack lift head
a little.
Before you start,
block the front and
rear of the tire farthest
away from the one
being changed. Then
put your spare tire
near theflat tire.
5-26
Hub Caps And Wheel Nut Caps
e
You will have to takeoff hub capsor wheel nut caps to reach your wheel
nuts.
If you have individual
wheel nut caps that
cover each nut, they
must be removed in
order to get the wheel
nuts. Use the socket
end of the wheel
wrench to remove the
wheel nut caps.
Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub
cap to the wheel. Remove these
wheel nut caps and retaining ring (if
so equipped) before you take
off the
hub cap.
If you havejust an aluminumor plastic molded hubcap, pry it off with the
chisel endof your wheel wrench.
Some of the molded
plastic hub caps have
imitation wheel nuts
molded into them. The
wheel wrench won’t
fit these imitation
nuts, so don’t try to
remove them with the
socket endof the
wheel wrench.
5-27
-
Some jack storage
covers are equipped
with a hub cap
removal tool. Position
hub cap removal tool
in notch.
Remove the hub cap.
Using the wheel
wrench, loosen all the
wheel nuts.Don’t
remove them yet.
5-28
Jack Locations
Position the jack under the vehicle.
A. Front Frame Hole
B. Rear Frame Hole (ZR2)
C . Spring Hanger Hole (Standard Pick-ups)
Your vehicle has a hole
in the frame near each front wheel, anda hole in the
spring hanger near each
rear wheel for the jack. Fit the jack into the hole
nearest the flat tire.
I NOTICE:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned will
damage the vehicleor may anow the vehicle to fall
off the jack.
Be sure tofit the jack lift head into the proper location before
raising your vehicle.
5 -29
Raise the vehicleby
rotating the
jackhandle to the
right. Raisethe
vehicle far enough off
the ground so thereis
enough roomfor the
spare tire tofit.
5-30
Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare
wheel. Place the spare
on the wheel
mounting surface.
€'ut on the spare tire.
5 -31
Put the nuts on by
hand. Make sure the
cone-shaped end is
toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
If a nut
can’t be turned by hand, use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon
as possible.
..
Lower the vehicle by
rotating the
jackhandle tothe left.
Lower thejack
completely.
L
5-32
k.
Tightening
Wheel
Tightening
Nut Sequence
Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss-cross sequence
as
shown. Remove the wheel blocks.
Storing 'The Tire in The Underbody Carrier
Put the tireon the ground at the rearof the vehicle, with the valve stem
pointed down andto the rear.
Pull the retaining bar through the wheel.
NOTE: With ZR2 option, spring and retainer must be separated to insert
through wheel opening.
Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle, through the hole in the
rear bumper andinto the hoist shaft. Turnthe wheel wrench right until the
tire is raised against the underside
of the vehicle.
You will hear two"clicks" when the tire is secure, but pull on tire
the to
make sure.
5-33
Storing The Jacking Equipment
Return thejack, wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the proper location
behind the seat. Secure the items
and replace the jack cover.
NOTICE:
Don’t use the existing hoist to storea tire with an aluminum
wheel or itcould damage thewheel. Secure the tire in the pickup
bed.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
What youdon’t want to do when your vehicle
is stuck is to spin your
wheels. The methodknown as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re
stuck, butyou must use caution.
NOTICE:
Spinning yourwheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as
the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your
transmission back and forth,
you can destroy your transmission.
5-34
Rocking your vehicle to get it out:
First, turn your steering wheelleft and right. That will clearthe area around
your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between
“R’ (Reverse) and a
forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between First or Second gear
and Reverse), spinning the wheels little
as as possible. Releasethe
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightlytheonaccelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few
.tries,
you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery hooks,if your
vehicle has them.If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing
Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
Using the Recovery Hooks
If you ever get stuckin sand, mud,ice or snow, your vehicle may be
equipped with recovery hooks.The recovery hooks are provided at the front
of your vehicle.You may need to use them you’re
if
stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
5-35
I NOTICE:
I
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle
could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty.
5 -.3 6
Service & Appearance Care
Section
I
Here you willfind information about the care
of your vehicle. This part
begins with service and fuel information. and then it shows how to check
. There is also technical information
important fluid and lubricant levels
about your vehicle. anda section devoted to its appearance care
.
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
6-6
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
TransferCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
Brake Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Replacing Brake System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Vehiclestorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
6-33
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Maintenance Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
LoadingYourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-68
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-70
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-70
Capacities and Specifications Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-73
6-1
Service
Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy
it. with
We hope you’ll go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You’ll
get
genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts
have one of~thesernarks:
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do someof your own service work, you’ll want to get the
proper GM Service Manual. It tells you much more about how to service
your vehicle than this manual can.
To order the proper service manual, see
“Service Publications” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the
date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the
Index.
6-2
6-3
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
Your use of gasoline with deposit control additives will help prevent
deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. That helps keep your
engine in tune and your emission control system working properly. It’s good
for your vehicle, and you’ll be doing your for
partcleaner air.
Many gasolines are now blended with oxygenates. General
Motc
recommends that youuse gasolines with these blending niaterials,
sucn as
MTBE and ethanol. By doingso, you can help clean the air, especially in
those parts ofthe country that have high carbon monoxide levels.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers
are now producing reformulated
gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. General Motors recommends that you use reformulated gasoline.
By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in those parts
of the
country that have high ozone levels.
You should ask your service station operators
if their gasolines contain
deposit control additives and oxygenates, and if they have been
reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on drivingin another country outside theU.S. or Canada,
unleaded fuel may be hard tofind. Do not use leaded gasoline.
If you use
even one tankful, your emission controls won’t work well
at all.
or With
continuous use, spark plugs can get fouled, the exhaust system can corrode,
and your engineoil can deteriorate quickly.Your vehicle’s oxygen sensor
will be damaged. Allof that means costly repairs that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving.
You can also writeus at the following address for advice.
Just tell us where.
you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
North American Export Sales (NAES)
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
L1H 8P7
6-4
Filling Your Tank
The fuel cap is behind
a hinged door on the
left side of your
vehicle.
While refueling, hang
the cap inside the fuel
door.
To take off the cap,
turn it slowly to the
left.
6-5
Be carefulnot to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces
as
soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on,
turn it to the right until you heara clicking
noise.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer
can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type,it may not fitor
have proper venting, and your fuel tank and
emissions system
might be damaged.
Checking Things Under fhe
Hood
,
~
6-6
Hood Release
To open the hood, first
pull the handleinside
the vehicle on the
lower left side of the
instrument panel.
Then go tothe front of
the vehicle and release
the secondary hood
release.
Lift the hood, release
the hood propfrom its
retainer and put the
hood prop into the slot
in the hood. You will
have an underhood
light that comes on
when you lift the
hood.
Before closing the
hood, be sureall the
filler caps are on
properly. Thenlift the
hood to relieve
pressure on the hood
Prop.
6-7
Remove the hood prop
from the slot in the
hood and return the
prop toits retainer.
Then just pull the
hood down and close
it firmly.
6-8
Engine Oil
It’s a goodidea to check your engine oil every time youfuel.
get In order to
get an accurate reading, the
oil must be warmand the vehicle must be on
level ground.
Turn off the engine
and give theoil a few
rninutes todrain back
into theoil pan. If you
don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the
actual level.
To Check Engine Oil
Pull outthe dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth, then push
it
back in all the way. Remove
it again, keeping the tip lower.
When to Add Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need to add someoil. But
you must usethe right kind. This section explains what kind
of oil to use.
For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”in the Index.
6-9
I Don’t
NOTICE:
add too much oil.
If your engine hasso much oil that the
oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
Just fill it enough to
put the level
somewhere in the
proper operating
range. Push the
dipstick allthe way
back in when you’re
through.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Beginning midyear1993, oils of the proper qualityfor your vehicle will be
identified with this new “starburst” symbol. The “starburst” symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified
by the American PetroleumInstitute
(API), andis perferred for use in your gasoline engine.
You should look for this on the frontof the oil container, and use only oils
that display thisnew symbol.
6-10
You should also use me proper viscosity
oil for your vehicle,as shown in
the following chart:
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE €XPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
LOOK FOR
ONE OF THESE
LABELS
HOT
WEATHER
-C
/ F
\
+loo
- -- + 3 8
+80
- - - + 27
+60
- -- + 1 6
+40
- -- + 4
+20
- -- - 7
O--
- -18
SA! 1OW-30
SAE SW-30
PREFERRED
1
COLD
WEATHER
IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30
GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30
GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES
ABOVE 40 DEGRfES F (4 DEGREES C).
DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR
ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you
can use SAE 1OW-30 if it's going to be0°F (-18 "C)or above. These
numbers onan oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use
other viscosityoils, such as SAE 1OW-40 or S A E 20W-50.
6-11
If you cannot find oils with the
new “starburst” symbol on the
front of the
container, you should lookfor and use oils containing the following three
things:
SHor SG
“SH orSG” must be onthe oil container,either by itself or combined
with other quality designations, such as “SWCD,”
“SH, SG, CD,”
“SG/CD,”etc. These letters show American Petroleum Institute
(API)
levels of quality.
0
SAE 5W-30
Energy Conserving I1
Oils with these words on the container will help you save
fuel.
These three things are usually included in a doughnut shaped logo (symbol)
on most containers.If you cannot find oils with the “starburst” symbol,
you
should look for oils with the doughnut shaped symbol, containing the three
things noted above.
NOTICE:
If you use oils that do not have either the “starburst” symbol or
an API SH or SG designation, you can cause engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@ oil (in Canada,
GM Engine Oil) meets all the
requirements for your vehicle.
6- 12
1
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t addanything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you
think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
See if any one of these is true for you:
Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km).
0
It’s below freezing outside and most trips areless than 10 miles (16
km).
The engine is at low speed most
of the time (as in door-to-door
delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic).
You tow a trailer often.
Most trips are through dusty places.
0
The vehicle is frequently operated off-road.
If any one of these is truefor your vehicle, then you need to change your
oil
andfilter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months - whichever comes
first.
If none of them is true, change the oil every
7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12
months - whichever comesfirst. Change thefilter at the first oil change
and at every other oil change after that.
Four-wheel Drive Remote Oil Filter
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you will have a remote
oil filter
located under the radiator support. There is a special access door
the in
vehicle body skirt shield.
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater)
An engine coolant heater can be a big help
if you have to parkoutside in
very cold weather,0 “F (-1 8 O C) or colder.If your vehicle has this option,
see “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engineoil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used
oil stay
on your skinfor very long. Clean your skin and nails
with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash
or properly throw away clothing
or rags
containing wed engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposalof oil products.)
6-13
Used oil canDe a real threat to the environment.
If you change your own oil,
be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t
ever disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead, recycleit by taking it to
a place that collects used oil.
If you have a problem properly disposing
of
your used oil, ask your dealer, a service stationa local
or recycling center
for help.
Air Cleaner
To remove the round air cleaner filter
for the 4.3L (VIN2) engine, turn the
wing nuts to the left. Remove the cover and change the filter. Care should be
taken during reassembly to ensure that the cover is on straight
theand
wingnuts properly tightened.
To remove the squareair cleaner filterfor the 2.2L (VnV.4) and the4.3L
(VIN W) engines, open both clamps and push the rear
of the air cleaner
back toward the rearof the engine compartment to change the filter.
While reassembling theair cleaner assembly, ensure thatthe air cleaner
cover tabsare fully insertedinto the slotsin the air cleaner housing and the
PCV air tube is properly seatedin the left hand valve cover.
the
Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace air
filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
NOTICE:
If’the air cleaneris off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine
will damage
fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which
it. Always have theair cleaner in place when you’re driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the
engine oil is changed. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to change yourfluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the
Index.
How to Check
Because this operation can be little
a difficult, you may choose to have this
done at a GM dealership Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could
get afalse reading onthe dipstick.
6-15
I
I NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission.
Too
much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on
hot engine parts or exhaust system, starting aBe
fire.
sure to get
an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you
have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).
At high speedfor quite a while.
In heavy traffic- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating
temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°Cto 93°C).
To check transmissionfluidhot: Get the vehicle warmed upby driving
about 15 miles (24km)when outside temperatures are above50°F (10OC).
If it's colder than 50°F (10"C), drive the vehicle in "D" (3rd Gear) until the
engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady
for ten minutes.
Then follow the hot check procedures.
Tu check transmissionfluid cold: A cold check is made after the vehicle has
been sittingfor eight hours or more with the engine off and is used only
a as
reference. Let the engine run idle
at for five minutes if outside temperatures
are 50°F (10OC) or more.If it's colder than50°F (lO"C), you may haveto
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during a cold check,
you must perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a
more accurate readingof the fluid level.
To check the fluid hot
or cold
Park your vehicle on a level place.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in "P'(Park).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each
gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range. Then,
position the shiftlever in "P' (Park).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
. - .*.
6- 16
I
3. Check both sidesof the dipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid
level must be in the COLD area for a cold checkor in the HOT area or
cross-hatched area for a hot check.
6-17
4. If the fluid level
is in the
acceptable range,
push the dipstick
back in all the
way; then flip the
handle down to
lock the dipstick
in place.
How to Add Fluid
Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind
of transmission
fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add only enoughof the proper fluid to bring
the
level up to the COLD areafor a cold check or the
HOT area for a hot check.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a Don’t
pint. overfill. We
recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON@-I11
or DEXRON@-IIE,
because fluids with that label are made especially
for your automatic
transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@-I11
or
DEXR0N’-IIE is not coveredby your new vehicle warranty.
0 After adding fluid, recheckthe fluid levelas described under “How to
Check.”
0
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back
in all
the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have
it checked is when the engine
oil is changed. However,
the fluid in your manual transmission
doesn’t require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be
a little difficult, youmay choose to have this
done at a GM dealership Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could
get afalse reading.
6-18
NOTICE:
Too much or toolittle fluidc m damage your transmission.Too
much can mean that some the’fluid
of
could come out and fall
on
hot engine parts or exhaust
systm, starting a fire. Be sure to get
an accurate readingif you check your transmission fluid.
Check thefluid level only ‘whenyour engine is off, the vehicleis parked on
a level placeand the transmissionis cool enoughfor you to rest your fingers
on the transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom
of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, installthe plug and be sureit is fully seated.If
the fluid level is low, add more fluidas described in the next steps.
How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the
Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid’atthe filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the bottomof the filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be surethe plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutchin your vehicle is self-adjusting. A slight amount of
play (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch) in the pedal is normal.
When to Check and Whatto Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often you should
check the fluid level
in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and what to
add. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
How to check
The proper fluid should be added
if the level does not reach the bottom
of
the diaphragm when it’s in place in the reservoir. Seeinstructions
the
on the
reservoir cap.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to changeit. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Index.
6-20
I
i
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below
the bottomof the filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
Add enough lubricant
to raisethe level to the
bottom of the filler
plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind
of lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.
Four- Wheel Drive
Most lubricant checksin this section also apply to four-wheel-drive
vehicles. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the
lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” inthe Index.
6-21
How to Check Lubricant
If the levelis below
the bottom of the
filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to
the
bottom of the filler
plug hole.
The arrow on the left shows the drain plug location. The arrow
on the right
shows the filler plug location.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind
of lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to changeit. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the levelis below
the bottomof the filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
6-22
I
If the differential is at operating temperature (w,arm), add enough lubricant
to raisethe level to the bottom
of the filler plug hole.
If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 1/2 inch
(12 mm) below the filler plug hole.
What to use
Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind
of lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.
Engine Coolant
The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant itwhen
is low.If you have a problem with engine overheating,
see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
The proper coolantfor your vehicle will:
Give freezing protection down to
-20 “F (-29” C), or -34°F (-37 “C) in
Canada andfor vehicles with the cold climate option.
e Give boiling protection upto 258°F (125°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
What to Use
Use a mi,xture of one-halfclean water (preferably distilled) andone-half
antifreeze that meets “GM Specification
603%” or “GM Specification
6043-M ”for the 2.2L (LN2) Code 4 engine, which won’t damage
aluminum parts. You can also usea recycled coolant conforming to
“GM
Specification 603%” or “GM Specification6043-M ”for the 2.2L (LN2)
Code 4 engine with a complete coolant flush and refill.
If you use this
mixture, you don’t needto add anything else.
6-23
I NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolantmix, your engine could overheat
and be badly damaged.The repaircost wouldn’t be coveredby
mix can freeze and crack
your warranty.Too much water in the
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Some conditions, such as air trapped in the cooling system, can affect the
cold
coolant level in the radiator. Check the coolant level when the isengine
and foilow the steps under “Adding Coolant”
for the proper way to add
coolant.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,your
havedealer
check your cooling system.
I NOTICE:
If you use the propercoolant, you don’t have to add extra
inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the
system. These
can be harmful.
Adding Coolant
To Check Coolant
When your engineis cold, the coolant level should be at
“ADD,” or a little
higher. When your engineis warm, the level should be up “FULL
to
HOT,”
or alittle higher.
To Add Coolant
If you need more
coolant, add the
proper mix at the
coolant recovery tank.
I
6-24
Add coolant mix at the recoverytank, but be careful not to spill
it.
Radiator Pressure Cap
I NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and
must be tightly installed to prevent coolant
loss and possible
engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
When you replace
your radiator pressure
cap, aGM cap is
recommended. See
“Service Replacement
Part and Filter
Recommendations” in
the Index.
6-25
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperatureis controlled by a thermostat in the engine
coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the
radiator until the coolant reachesa preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an
AC@thermostat is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
NOTICE:
Always turn the engine
off before checking or adding power
steering fluid. The power steering cap is close
to the fan and
other moving parts.
6-26
Then remove thecap
again and lookat the
fluid level on the
dipstick.
A
0
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the“HOT”
mark.
When the engine compartment is cool, the level should be
at the
“FULL COLD” mark.
What to Add
Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule to determine what kindof fluid to use.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.
NOTICE:
When adding power steering fluid or making
a complete fluid
change, always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
6-27
Windshield Washer Fluid
To Add
I
Open the cap labeled
“WASHER FLUID
ONLY.” Add washer
fluid until the bottle
is
full.
NOTICE:
0
0
When using concentrated washer fluid,follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can
cause thesolution to freeze and damage your washer fluid
of the washersystem, AIso, water
tank and other parts
doesn’t clean as well as washerfluid.
Fill your washer fluid tankonly 3/4 full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion, which could damage the tank
if it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It
can damage your washer
system and paint.
Fluid Leak Check
After the vehicle has been parked for a while, inspect the surface under the
vehicle for water, oil, fuel or other fluids. Water dripping from air
the
conditioning system afterit has been usedis normal. If you notice fuel leaks
or fumes, the causes should be found and corrected at once.
6-28
Brakes
Brake Master Cylnder
Your brake master
cylinder is here. It is
filled withDOT-3
brake fluid.
your master cylinder
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid in
level
might go down,The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are
in, put
the
fluid level goes back up.
The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the
brake system.If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at
all. So, it isn’t a goodidea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid
won’t correct a leak.If you addfluid when your linings are worn, then
you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings.
You should add
(or remove) brakefluid, as necessary, only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake
fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index.
6-29
To Check Brake Fluid
I
You can check the
brake fluid without
taking off the cap.Just
look at the windows
on the brakefluid
reservoir.
The fluid levels should be above
‘“IN.’’ If they aren’t, have your brake
system checkedto see if there is a leak.
After work is doneon the brake hydraulic system, make sure the levels are
above “MIN” and below the topof each window.
What to Add
When you do need brake
fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid- such as
Delco Supreme
(GM Part No.1052535). Use new brake fluidfrom a
sealed container only, and always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap before
removing it.
I
I
@
NOTICE:
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kindof fluid. For
example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brakesystem candamage brakesystem parts so
badly that they’ll have to be replaced. :
Brake fluid can damage paint,so be careful not to spill brake
fluid on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See
“Appearance Care” in the
Index.
6-30
Brake Wear
Your vehicle hasfront disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The
sound may come andgo or be heardall the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you
-arepushing on the brake pedal
firmly).
I NOTICE:
I
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in
costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the
brakes arefirst applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, butif you ever heara
rear brake rabbing noise, have therear brake linings inspected.Also, the
rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the
itretires
removed for rotation or changing. When you have
the front brakes replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced
as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height,
if or
there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a signof brake
trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time youmake a brake stop, your disc brakes adjust
for wear.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal,
your rear drum brakes
may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing upfirmly
and applying the
brakes a few times.
6-31
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle
is complex. Its many parts have to
be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Vehicles we design and test havetopquality GM brake partsin
them, as your vehicle does whenit is new. When you replace parts of your
braking system-for example, when your brake linings wear down and
you have to have new ones putinbe sureyou get new genuine GM
replacement parts.If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change,
for the
worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change
in many
other ways if someone puts the
in wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@ battery.
You never have to add
water toone of these. When it’s timefor a new battery,we recommend a
Delco Freedom’ battery. Get one that has the catalog number shown on the
original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle
for 25 days or more, takeoff the
black, negative(-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery
from running down.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage
periods.
For more information, contact your dealer’s service department, or write:
Adistra Corporation
171 Hamilton Street
Plymouth, MI 48 170
In Canada, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Services Department
Oshawa, Ontario L1J 5Z6 Canada
6-32
!
Fluid Leak Check
After thevehcle has been parkedfor awhile, inspect the surface under the
vehicle for water, oil, fuel OX other fluids. Water drippingfrom the air
conditioning system afterit has been usedis normal. If you noticefuel leaks
or fumes, the causes should be found and corrected at once.
Bulb Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that
all the lights are off and the
engine isn’t running.
Halogen Bulbs
NOTICE:
Composite Headlights
1. Open the hood.
2. Removethe
screws at the top
of the radiator
support.
3. Pull the headlight
lens assembly
out.
4. Unplug the
electrical
connector.
1
6-34
5. Turn thebulbto
6 . Put the new bulb
into the headlight
lens assembly
and turnit to the
right until it is
tight.
7. Plug in the
electrical
connector.
8. Put the headlight lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and
tighten the screws.
Sealed Beam Headlights
1. Remove the
screws fromthe
headlight retainer.
2. Pull the headlight
out and remove
the retainer.
3. Unplugand
remove the
headlight.
4. Plug in the new headlight and putit in place.
5. Put the retainer on the headlight and install and tighten the screws.
6-35
Front ParklTurn Signal Lights
(Composite and Sealed Beam)
If you have fog lamps, the fog lamp bracket must be removed before you
can replace the front park/turn signal lights.
1. Reach under the bumper and behind the parking/turn signal light
assembly.
_. Turn the socket to
the left and pull it
out.
3. Pull the bulb out
of the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket.
5. Put the socket back into
the parking/turn signal light assembly and
turn
it to the right untilit locks in place.
6-36
Rear Lights
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the light
assembly screws
near the tailgate
latch and pullout
the light
assembly.
3. Pull the light
assembly away
from the pickup
side panel.
4. Turn the socket to
the left to remove
it. Push the tab in
while you turn
the socket.
5. Pull the bulb out.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket.
7. Put the socket into the light assemblyand turn the socket to the right
until it locks in place.
8. Replace thelight assembly. Install and tighten the screws.
9. Close the tailgate.
6-37
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1. Remove the
CHMSL lens
retaining screws.
2. Remove the
CHMSL lens.
. ,
.
.
.i
. .
.
.
..
.
I 3. Removethe
CHMSL bulb.
4. Install the new
CHMSL bulb.
5. Replace the
CHMSL lens.
Install and tighten
the screws.
6-38
Other Maintenance Items
Front Suspension and Steering Linkage
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to lubricate the
fittings and what typeof lubricant to use.
Front Wheel Bearings (Two-Wheel Drive)
If your vehicleis two-wheel drive, it has wheel bearings that must be
cleaned and repacked.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often this be
must
done.
Single Belt Accessory Drive
Your new vehicle uses a serpentine belt that is lighter, and more durable
thansystc .s with several belts.
The belt runs over or around the pulleys on the engine. A tensioner
is used
to keep the belt tight at all times. The tensioner also makes replacing
the
belt easierif you need to replace the belt, be sure
to get the correct
replacement belt. Your dealership or parts supplier can help
you with this.
The Accessory Drive Belt Routing label on your vehicle will show you how
to routethe belt your vehicle uses.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
NOTICE:
Use care when removing or installing a blade assembly.
Accidental bumping can cause the arm to fall back and strike
the windshield.
6-39
To Remove the Old Wiper Blade:
* Lift the wiperarm until it locksinto a vertical position.
1. Blade Assembly
2. Arm Assembly
3. Locking Tab
4. Blade Pivot
5. Hook Slot
6 . Arm Hook
Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the
blade assembly to releaseit from the wiperarm hook.
Kemove the insert from the blade assembly.
The insert has two notches
at one end that are locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly. At
the notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
t
6-40
.
L
.
..
-:
To Install the New wlper Blade:
0 Slide the insert (notched endlast) into the blade clawsat end “A”.
Plastic caps will beforced off as the insertis fully inserted.
1. End ”A”
2. End ”B”
3. Retaining Caps
4. Notch
-6-41
Be sure that the notches are locked
by the bottom claws. Make sure that
all other claws are properly locked on both sides
of the insert slots.
2
1. Claw in Notch
2. Correct Installation
3. Incorrect Installation
Put the blade assembly pivot
in the wiper arm hook. Pull up until the
pivot locking tab locksin the hook slot.
Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield.
Air Conditioning
Every now and then have your dealership check your air conditioning
system to be sureit has not lost any cooling ability.
If you think the system
is not working properly, have your dealership check it out as soon as
possible.
The air conditioning will not work when the temperature is(4°C).
- v 40°F
Lubrication
Accelerator Control System
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often the accelerator
linkage pivot points must
be lubricated and what type
of lubricant touse.
Accelerator cables and cruise control cables should not be lubricated. Any
cables thatare worn or are hard to pull should be replaced.
When cleaning the engine compartment with water or steam, avoid directing
the flow onto the throttle linkage
in a manner that would cause moisture to
enter the cables.
Hood Latches and Hood Hinge
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how to lubricate the hood
latch and hoodhinge assembly.
Propeller Shaft Slip Splines/Universal Joints
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often theslip and
universal joints must be lubricated and what type
of lubricant to use.
Body
Normal use of your vehicle will cause metalto metal wear at some points on
the cab and body if they are
not lubricated.
For exposed surfaces, such as door checks, door lock bolts, lock striker
plates, dovetail bumper wedges, etc., a thin film
of engine oil should be
applied.
Where oil holes are provided in the body cab,
or a dripless oil can be used.
The seat adjusters and seat track should be lubricated with chassis grease.
Door weatherstrips and rubber hood bumpers should be wiped clean with a
wet cloth and lightly coated with a rubber lubricant.
Never use too muchof any lubricant and be sure to wipe up any extra
lubricant when you are finished.
Window regulators and controls areinside the doors. They are lubricated
with along lasting grease.If lubrication is required your dealer should
perform this service.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how oftenlubricate
to
these items and what type
of lubricant to use.
Lock Cylinders
To be sure your locks operate properly, they must be lubricated.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to lubricate them
and what typeof lubricant to use.
You should not use penetrating oils because they could wash the
outfactory
installed lubricant and cause
the lock to bind. De-icers which contain
alcohol couldalso wash away the lubricant,so be sure to lubricate thelock
after using a de-icerof this type.
Tailgate Handle
The tailgate handle pivot points
on your vehicle should be lubricated to keep
the handle working smoothly.
Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to lubricate them
and what typeof lubricant to use.
Exhaust System
To help prevent damage to your exhaust system, do not continue to drive
your vehicle if you notice:
Engine misfiring
Loss of performance
Other unusual operating conditions
Have your engine and exhaust system serviced regularly.
Three- Way Catalytic Converter
Your vehicle's three-way catalytic converteris designed to reduce the
pollutants in your vehicle's exhaust. Use only unleaded
fuel in your vehicle.
If you use leadedfuel, you could damage your three-way catalytic converter
and other engine components.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (SERVICE
ENGINE SOON )
This light on your instrument panel lets you know when your emission
system needs service. The light will come on briefly when you start your
engine tolet you know that the systemis working. If it does not come on
when you start your engine, or itifcomes on and stays on while
you're
driving, your system may
need service. Your vehicle should still be
driveable, butyou should have your system serviced right away.
6-44
Engine Control Module System
This system has an oxygen
(02) sensor that helps keep your engine’s
air-fuel mixture at a proper level. Use only unleaded
fuel in your vehicle.If
you use leaded fuel, you could damage your oxygen
(02) sensor and affect
your vehicle’s emissions.
Loading Your Vehicle
The CertificatiodTire label is found on the driver’s door lock pillar. The
label shows the size
of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed
to obtain thegross weight capacityof your vehicle. Thisis called the
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).
The GVWR includesthe weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The CertificatiodTire label also tells you the maximum weights
for the
front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). To find out
the actualloads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weighyour vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally
on both sidesof the centerline.
Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either thefront or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy
load, you should spreadit out.
6-45
Using heavier suspension componentsto get added durability might not
change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you your
loadvehicle
the rightway.
I NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parrs
QF components thatfail
because of overloading.
If you put things insideyour vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages,
or
anything else - they will go asfast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
Payload
The iyload Capacity is shown on the Certificatioflire label. This is the
maximum load capacity that your vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the
weight of the peopleinside as part of your load.If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle
left the factory, remember to
subtract the weightof these things from the payload.
Your dealer can help
you with this.
Trailering Package
If your vehicle comes with the
Trailenng Package, mereis also a load rating
which includesthe weight of the vehicle and the trailerit tows. This rating
is called the Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).
When you weigh your trailer, besure to include the weightof everything
you put in it. And, rememberto figure the weight of the peopleinside as
part of your load.
Your dealer can helpyou determine yourGCWR.
Add-on Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a limit on how many
people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before
you buy andinstall the new equipment.
NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn’t cover parrs or components that fail
because of overloading.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
Open your glove box and look
for this label:
if your vehicle can carrya slide-in camper, how
This label will tell you
much of a loadyour vehicle can carry, and how to spread out your load the
right way. Also, it will help you match the right slide-in camper to your
vehicle.
When you carrya slide-in camper, the total cargo loadof your vehicle is the
weight of the camper,plus
everything else added to the camper afterit left the factory;
everything in the camper; and
all the people inside.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum weight
of the load your
vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include the weight
of the people inside. But,
vou can figure about150 pounds for each seat.
I ne
total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle’s
CWR.
Truck Loading Information
1. Recommended location for cargo centerof gravity for cargo weight
rating.
Refer to Truck Camper Loading Information labelin the glovebox for
“A”and “B” dimensions.
Use rear edge of load floor for measurement purposes
Example of Proper Truck and Camper Match
1. Camper center of gravity
2. Recommended centerof gravity location zone
The camper’.s centerof gravity should fall within the center of gravity zone
for your vehicle’s cargoload.
You must weigh any accessories, trailer hitches or other equipment you add
to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extra
weight may shorten the center of gravity zone
for your vehicle. Your dealer
can help you with this.
If your slide-in camper andits load weighless than the CWR, the center
of
gravity zonefor your vehicle may be larger.
Your dealer can helpyou make a good vehicle-camper match. He’ll also
help you determine your CWR.
After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper, drive to a weigh station and
weigh on thefront and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the loads on
your axles.The loads onthe front and rear axles shouldn’t be more than
either of the GAWRs. The total of the axle loads should not be more than
the GVWR.
Open your driver’s door and look
at the door lock pillar
for the
CertificationD‘ire label to find out your
GAWR and GVWR.
ve gone over ; Jr weight ratings, move or take out some things until
all the weights fall below the ratings. Of course, you should always tie down
any loose items when you load your vehicle or camper.
11 you
When you install and load your slide-in camper, check the manufacturer’s
instructions.
If you want more information on curb weights, cargo weights, cargo weight
rating and the correct center
of gravity zone for your vehicle, your dealer
can help you. Just ask
for a copyof “Consumer Information, TruckCamper Loading.”
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the
CWR for your vehicle. Weigh
your vehicle with your trailer attached,
so that you won’t go over the
GVWR or the GAWR.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread
out the weight of your load
the right way, and if youchoose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information,see “Trailer Towing’’ in the Index.
Pickup Conversion To Chassis Cab
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners
may consider having the
pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed.
However, we recommend that conversions
of this type not be done to this
pickup. Owners shouldbe aware that, as manufactured, there are differences
between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which may affect
vehicle safety. For further information, contactthe GM Zone Office for your
area. (See the “Warranty and Owner Assistance” booklet for Zone Office.)
6 --50
Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made
by a leading tire manufacturer. These tires are warranted
by the tire
manufacturers and their warranties
are delivered with every new vehicle.If
your spare tireis a different brand than your road tires, you will have a tire
warranty folder from each of these manufacturers.
6-51
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The CertificatiodTire label which is on the driver’s door lock pillar, shows
the correct inflation pressuresfor your tires, when they’re cold.
‘‘C01d’~
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than a mile.
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflationor overinflation is
all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough
air
(underinflation) you can get:
0
Too much flexing
0
Too much heat
0
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
If your tires havetoo much air (overinflation), you can get:
Unusual wear
0
Bad handling
Rough ride
0
Needless damage from roadhazards.
When to Check
Check your
spare tire.
..’
:s once a month or more. Also, check
the tire pressureof the
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. Simply looking
at the tires willnot tell you the pressure, especially if you have radial tires
- which may look properly inflated even
if they’re underinflated.
If your tires have valve caps, be sure to put them back on. They help prevent
leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.
Special Tire Inflation
If you have 31xlOSOR15LT/C tireson your vehicle, and:
-
You’ll be drivingfor very long at speedsof 66 mph (105km/h) to
75 mph (120 km/h) where legal, inflate tires to
10 psi (70 Wa) more
than therecornended cold inflation pressures.
- You’ll be drivingfor very long at speedsof 76 mph (120 km/h) to
85 mph (135 km/h) where legal, cold inflation pressures should be
increased by 10 psi (70 Wa) and you must also reduce axle load
capacity by 10%.Do not drive over85 mph (135km/h) even when
it’s legal.
Inflation pressures should never exceed
10 psi (70 P a ) above the
inflation specifiedfor the maximum loadof the tire.
lire Inspection and Rotation
To make your tireslast longer, have them inspected and rotated at the
mileages recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index.
Use this rotation
pattern.
The four wheel rotation isfor aluminum wheels only. Thefive wheel
rotation is for steel wheels only.
If your vehicle has front tires with different load ratings or tread designs
(such as all season vs. ordoff road) than the rear tires, don’t rotate your tires
front to rear.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressure
as shown onthe CertificatiodTire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
6-54
When lt’s Time forNew Tires
a
One way to tell when
it’s timefor new tires
is to check the
treadwear indicators,
which will appear
when your tires have
only 2/32 inch (1.6
mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tireif
0
0
You can see the indicators at three
or more places around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show
cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or locationof the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kmd andsize of tires you need, look at the
Certificatioflire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when
it was new had a Tire Performance
Criteria Specification( P C Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you
get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That
way, your
vehicle will continue to have tires that
are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during
normal service on your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followedby a “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having
a Spec number,
TPC
make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United
States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires
by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only
to
vehicles sold in the United States.)
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wearofrate
the
tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and a half
(1-1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
Tractlon - A, 9, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are: A, B, and C . They represent
the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete.A
tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight-ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning)
traction.
6-56
Temperature -A, By C
The temperature grades areA (the highest),B, and C , representing the tire’s
resistance to the generationof heat andits abilityto dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The gradeC corresponds to a level of performance whichall passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading,either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup andpossible tire failure.
These grades are molded on
the sidewalls of passenger car tires.
While the tires availableas standard or optional equipment on General
Motors vehicles may vary with respect to these grades,
all such tires meet
General Motors performance standards and have been approved
for use on
General Motors vehicles. All passenger type
(P Metric) tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in additionto these grades.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheelson your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire
life and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need
to have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or
the other, the alignment may need
to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted.
If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If
the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired).See your GM dealer if any of theseconditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind
of wheel youneed,
Each newwheel should have the same load carrying capacity, diameter,
width, offset, andbe mounted the same wayas the oneit replaces.
6-57
If you need to replaceany of your wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts,
replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts.This way, you
will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your
GM model.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life,
brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, headlight aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Used Replacement Wheels
6-58
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P235/75R15 or 31xlOSOR15LT/C sizetires,
don’t use tire chains; they can damage your
vehicle.
If you have othersize tires, use tire chainsonly where legal and
only when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chainsthat
are the propersize for your tires. Install them on the drive
axle
tires (four-wheel-drive vehicles can use chains on both
axles)
and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the endssecurely
fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear thechains contacting yourvehicle,
If the contact continues,slow down
stop and retighten them.
on damage your
until it stops. Driving too fast with chains will
vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning’ products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can
burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on apart
hot of the
if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
vehicle. Some are dangerous
When youuse anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to
follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your
doors or windows when you’re cleaning
the inside.
6-59
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
0 Benzene
Naphtha
0 Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
r a n t Thinner
0 Turpentine
0 Lacquer Thinner
0 Nail Polish Remover
6
They canall be hazardous- some more than others- and they canall
damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these
will damage your vehicle:
0
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
0
Bleach
0
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get of
riddust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or
leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Your vehicle dealer has two
GM cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a
foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather.
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can
-before they set.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often.
A soft
brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use
them, don’t saturate the stained area.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning,d e ; the entire area immediatelyor
it will set.
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Always clean a whole trim panelor section. Mask surroundingtrim
along stitchor welt lines.
Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the directions on the
container label.
0
Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material.
Don’t rub it roughly.
As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove
the
suds.
0
Rinse the section with a clean,wet sponge.
0
Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel
or cloth.
Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer or a heat lamp.
NOTICE:
Be careful with a hair dryer or heat
lamp. You could scorch the
fabric.
Wipe with a cleancloth.
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric
First, see if you have touse solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spots and
stains will cleanoff better withjust water and mild soap.
If you need to use a solvent:
0
Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with a clean, dull knife
or scraper. Use verylittle cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start
at the outsideof the
stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep changing to a clean section
of the cloth.
When you clean a stainfrom fabric, immediately dry the area with an
air hose, hair dryer, orheat lamp to help prevent a cleaning ring. (See
the previous NOTICE.)
Fabric Protection
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet that has been treated with
Scotchgard Fabric Protector, a3M product. Scotchgard protects fabrics
by repelling oil and water, which are the carriers
of most stains. Even with
this protection, youstill need to clean your upholstery and carpet often to
keep it looking new.
TM
TM
Further information on cleaningis available by calling 1-800433-3296 (in
Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167).
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy or Oily Stains
Such as grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream,
chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt.
Carefully scrape off excess stain.
Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
0
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain
if left on a vehicle
seat fabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful,
because the cleaner will dissolve them and
may cause them to spread.
Non-Greasy Stains
Such as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruitjuice, milk, soft drinks, wine,
vomit, urine and blood.
0
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with
cool
water.
0
If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier.
0
If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon(5ml) of baking soda to 1 cup
(250 ml) of lukewarm water.
If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Such as candy,ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains.
0
0
Carefully scrapeoff excess stain, then clean with cool water and allow
to dry.
If a stain remains, cleanit with solvent-type cleaner.
6 -.62
i
c-
Gleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a cleancloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to doit
more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them
off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a solvent-type vinyl cleaner.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap.
For stubborn stains, use a mild solution
of 10%isopropyl alcohol
(rubbing alcohol) and 90% water.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture
polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately.
If dirt is allowed to work
into finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use only rmldsoap and water to cleanthe top surfacesof the instrument
panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections
in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
6-63
Glass
Glass should be cleaned often.GM Glass Cleaner (GM Part
No. 1050427)
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and
dust films.
von’t use abrasive cleanerson glass, because they may cause scratches.
Avoid placing decals on the
inside rear window, since they may have to be
scraped off later.
1
.
-.
L
-
Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the
wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material mayonbe
the
blade or windshield.
Clean the outsideof the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami
Powder@ (GM Part
No. 1050011). The windshield is clean if beadsdo not
form when you rinseit with water.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedfull
in strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis and replaced when worn.
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss
retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish
is to keepit clean by washing
it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehiclein the direct raysof the sun. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild
detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that contain or
acid
abrasives.
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or
a 100%cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure vehicle washes
may causewater to enter your vehicle.
6-64
L
.
.I
0
-I -,
Finish Care
Occasional waxingor mild polishingof your vehicle may be necessary to
remove residuefrom the paint finish.You can get GM approved cleaning
products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” the
in
Index .)
Your vehicle has a “basecoatlclearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives
more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and
polishes that are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoatlclearcoat paint
finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a
basecoatdclearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl
marks.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts shouldbe cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing
with wateris all thatis usually needed. However, you may use GM Chrome
Polish on chromeor stainless steeltrim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protective trim,
never use autoor chrome polish, steamor caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright
metal parts.
Aluminum Wheels (If So Equipped)
Your aluminum wheels have a protective coating similarthetopainted
surface of your vehicle. Don’tuse strong soaps, chemicals, chrome polish,
abrasive cleanersor abrasive cleaning brusheson them because you could
damage this coating. After rinsing thoroughly, a wax be
may
applied.
1 NOTICE:
If you have aluminum wheels, don’t use an automatic vehicle
wash that has hard silicon carbide cleaning brushes. These
brushes can takeoff the protective coating.
6-65
White Sidewall Tires
Your GM dealer has aGM White Sidewall Tire Cleaner.
You can use a stiff
brush with the cleaner.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may
be required. (See “Recommended Fluids
& Lubricants” in the Index.)
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement,
make sure the body repair shop applies
anti-corrosion material to the parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Foreign Material
. .
Calcium chloride and other salts,
ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, and other
foreign
matter can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces.
Use cleaners that are marked safe
for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired
right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available
from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas
of finish damagecan
be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
6-66
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on
the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can
occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain
water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed
in closed areasof the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed.
Your
dealer oran underbody vehicle washing system can do this
for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weatherand atmospheric conditions can cre; a chemical fallout.
Airborne pollutantscan fall upon and attackpaintea surfaces on your
-'
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shape
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint
sur - :e.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,GM will repair, at no charge
to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20000 km) of purchase, whichever
comes first.
This applies only to materials manufactured and sold
by General Motors.
Bodies, body conversions or equipment not made or sold by General Motors
are not covered.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
DESCRIPTION
SIZE PART
NUMBER
105017216
USAGE
oz. (0.473L) Tar andRoadOilRemoves
old
Remover
waxes,
polishes,
tar
and road oil
16 oz. (0.473L)ChromeCleanerRemovesrustand
1050173
Polish
corrosion
and
on
chrome and
sta ess steel
16 oz. (0.473L)WhiteSidewall
1050174
Tire Cleaner
1050214
32 oz. (0.946L)VinylLeather
Spot and stain
Cleaner
removal on leather
or vinyl
105024416
oz. (0.473L)
Fabric
Cleaner
Spot and stain
removal on cloth
and fabric
6- 67
PART
NUMBER
1050427
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
23 oz. (0.680L)GlassCleaner
USAGE
Glass cleaning and
spot cleaning on
vinyls
Cleans vinyl and
cloth on doortrim,
seats, and
carpet-also tires
and mats
8 oz. (0.237L)VinylTopCleanerCleaning
of vinyl
tops
Vinyl top dressing
oz. (0.473L)
Preservatone
Spot and stain
8 oz. (0.237L)
Spot
Lifter
removal on cloth
and fabric
1050429
6
lbs.
(2.72
kg)
Multi-Purpose
Powder Cleaner
1050729
1051055
16
1051398
105287016
105020116
oz. (0.473L)
Wash-Wax
(conc.)
Exterior
wash
Exterior cleaner
oz. (0.473L)
Magic
Mirror
Cleaner-Polish
and polish
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
I
This is the legal identifier
for your vehicle. It appears on a plate
in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver's side. You can seeit if you
look through the windshield
from outside your vehicle. TheVIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth characterin your VIN is the engine code.This code will help
you identify yourengine, specifications, and replacementparts.
ICD 1 I
cv I
c3 I _
I-
I 8"
I
~
L
2
IJ
4-
Q
1
0
0
u-
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this labelon the insideof the glove box.
-
WHEELBASE
I
:
-.
I
DO NOT REMOVE
Service Parts ldentificotion
VEHICLE
<
IDENTlFlCATlON
NUMBER
~ ~ 0 ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ARL A02
A65
K19K64
B6Y BSA
B9K
LC3 M X lM 3 1
6BJ 62L 62U 67D
671
679
I
PAINTTECHNOLOGY
7
ooooo
00000
C60 D1B 0 3 5 €52 E6E E92 FLT GUl JM7
I
)- MODELDESIGNATION
OPTION
CONTENT
NA5 NE1 QMXVK3 VC2VY1VY4V73Y19ZJ7
7BJ 8HJ SHJ
I
I
ORDER NUMBER
EXTERIOR COLORS
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
your VIN,
0 the model designation,
0 paint information, and
0 a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check
with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits
by a
combination of fuses, circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links in the
wiring itself.This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical
problems.
Headlights
The headlight wiringis protected by a circuit breaker in
the light switch.An
electrical overload will causethe lights to go on and off,or in some cases to
remain off. If this happens, have your headlight wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motoris protected by a circuit breaker and fuse.
a If
the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until .the
motor cools.If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not
snow, etc., be sure toget it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakersin the fuse panel protectthe power windows and other
power accessories. Whenthe current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting the circuit until
the problem is fixed.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The optional seven-wire trailer wiring harnessis protected by an in-line
fuse in the batteryfeed wire. This fuse is near the junction block. See
“Trailer Wiring Harness”in the Features & Controls section.
Fuse Block
The fuse blockis in
the instrument panel
on the driver’s side.
Remove the cover by
turning the fastenerto
the left. Thenyou can
remove fuses with a
fuse extractor.
i
c
. .
Spare fuses are provided, however
if you ever have a problem on the road
and don’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” of
one
the correct value.Just
pick some featureof your vehicle that you can get along without-like the
radio or cigarettelighter-and use its fuse, if it is of the value you need.
Replace it as soon as you can. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in this
section.
TOreinstall thefuse panel cover, push in and turn the fastener to the right.
6-72
Capacities and Specification Charts
Replacement Parts
Replacement part numberslisted in this section are based on the latest
information availableat the time of printing, and are subject to change.
If a
part listedin this manualis not the same asthe part used in your vehicle
when it was built, orif you have any questions, please contact your
GM
truck dealer.
Engine Identification
Engine
Type
VZN Code
Fuel Systems
Emissions
2.2L
L4
4
MPI*
LD
4.3L
V6
Z
TBI**
LD
4.3L
V6
W
CPI** *
LD
*Multi-Port Fuel Injection
**Throttle-Body Fuel Injection
***Central-Port Fuel Injection
Wheel Nut Torque
DESCRIPTION
Base or Optional Wheel
TORQUE
35 ft. lbs. (130 Nom)
Cooling System Capacity
ENGINE
2.2L
4.3L
4.3L
VIN
QUANTITY*
11.5 Quarts (11 Liters)
12.1 Quarts (11.5 Liters)
12.1 Quarts (11.5 Liters)
Z
w
*All quantitiesare approximate. Afterrefill, the levelMUST be rechecked.
6-73
Crankcase Capacity
ENGINE
VIN
2.2L
4
4.3L
z
4.3L
W
QUANTITY
QUANTITY
WITH
WITHOUT
FILTER*
FILTER*
4 Quarts(3.8Liters)4.5Quarts
(4.3 Liters)
4 Quarts.(3.8Liters)
4.5 Quarts (4.3 Liters)
4 Quarts(3.8Liters)4.5Quarts
(4.3 Liters)
*All quantities are approximate. After
refill, the level MUST be rechecked.
Fuel Tank Capacity
QUANTITY*
20 Gallons (76 Liters.)
TYPE
Standard Tank
*All quantities are approximate.
Lamp andBulb Data
LAMPS
QUANTITY
TRADE NO.
2
2
2E1H
H9005 (HI)
H9006 (LO)
3057
194
194
EXTERIOR
Headlamps (Sealed Beam)
Headlamps (Composite)
2
Backup Lamp
License Lamp(w/o Bumper)
License Lamp (Step Bumper)
Tail and Stop Lamps
Marker Lamp-Front
Marker Lamp-Rear
Parking and Signal Lamp
Underhood Lamp
CHMSL?$
2
2
2
1
2
?Standard Cluster
$Tach Cluster
6.- 74
I
3057
194
194
3 157NA
93
577
INTERIOR
Ash Tray Lamp
Courtesy Lamp
Dome Lamp
Fol -WheelDrive - lit, lr
Hearer & A/C Controi
Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp
Rearview Mirror Lamps
Sunshade Vanity Mirror Lamps
1
161
2
1
906
4
211-2
161
37
1003
2 12-2
74
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LAMPS
NOTE: A PC part number indicates that the bulb and base are one
assembly and must be replacedas such.
LAMPS
QUANTITY
TRADE NO.
Anti-lock Brake Warning Indicator?$
Brake System Warning Indicator?$
Check Gages Indicator?$
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator?$
Charging System Indicator?$
High Beam Indicator?$
Standard Cluster Illumination?
1
PC74
PC74
Tach Cluster Illumination$
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon)?$
Seat Belt Indicator?$
Turn Signal Indicator?
Upshift Indicator?$
?Standard Cluster
$Tach Cluster
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
1
1
PC74
PC74
PC74
PC74
PC 194 and
PC119
PC194 and
GE 194
PC74
PC74
PC74
PC74
30 A
rxlCPWR
WDO
7
20 A
PWR']
ACCY
A
20A
r 4 W D
1
N
20 A
rFOG
A
1
N
N
w
N
P
VI
0
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
FUSE/CIRCUIT
BREAKER
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
PWR ACCY Power Door Locks
PWR WDO Power Windows
STOP/HAZStopLamps,HazardLamps,Chime
Module
HORNDM Dome Lamp, Lighted Visor Mirror,
Glove Box Lamp,Horn, I/€' Courtesy
Lamps, Power Mirrors
T/LCTSYElectricShiftTransferCaseModule,
Park Lamps, License Plate Lamps
GAUGESAutoTransmission,AlternatorField,
Variable Throttle Control, A/C
Compressor, Cluster, Chime Module,
Four-wheel Drive Indicator Lamp,
Heated Oxygen Sensor, Daytime
Running Lamps Module
(NOT USED)
6-76
FUSEKIRCUIT
BREAKER
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
Blower Motor, Temperature Door
Motor
PWRAUXPwr
AuxiliaryOutlets
(NOT USED)
ECM BATT Engine Computer (Battery), ABS
Battery, Fuel Pump
ECMIGNEngineComputer(Ignition),
Injectors, Engine Sensors
Radio, Inside Rearview Mirror Map
RADIO
Lamps
(NOT USED)
RDO/BATT Clock, Radio Battery, CD Player
ILLUM
Cluster Illumination, Ash Tray Lamp,
Radio Illumination, Heater Lamp,
Four-wheel Drive Illumination,
Chime Module, Fog Lamp Switch
Illumination, Daytime Running
Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (Canada
DRL
Only)
TURN B/U Turn Signals, Backup Lamps
WIPER
Windshield Washer, Windshield
Wiper Motor
BRAKE
Speedometer, Anti-lock Braking
System, Cruise Control
4 WD
Four-wheel Drive
(NOT USED)
Fog Lamps
FOG
HTR N C
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
Service Replacement Part and Filter
Recommendations
Engine (VIN)
Oil Filter
Air Cleaner Filter
PCV Valve
Spark Plugs*
Fuel Filter
Radiator Cap
2.2L (4)
PF47
A1163C
cv9ooc
AC908
GF48 1
RC36
4.3L (Z)
PF52
A773C
CV789C
.CR43TSM
GF48 1
RC36
4.3L (W)
PF52
A1163C
cv774c
.CR43TSM
GF481
RC36
*Use copper-cored resistor type spark plugs.
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning
system in your vehicle needs refrigerant,be sure the proper refrigerant is
used. If you’re not sure, ask your
GM dealer. For additional information,see
your “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” booklet.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity
TYPE
R-l34a
*All q1
SYSTEM
c-60
QUANTITY*
30 oz. ( 3 5 kg)
..
Les are
approximate.
NOTICE:
R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in
an air conditioning system. R-12 in an R-134a system will cause
compressor failure, refrigerant oil sludge,
or poor air
conditioning system performance.
Scheduled MaintenanceServices
Section
.
This section coversthe maintenance required€or your vehicle
. Your vehicle
needs these services to retainits safety. dependability. and emission control
performance.
A Word About Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Selecting The Proper Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-4
Maintenance Schedule I ................................
7-6
Maintenance Schedule I1 ................................
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
At Least Once a Month ...................................
7-10
7-10
At Least Four Times a Year ...............................
AtLeastOnceaYear ....................................
7-10
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Recommended Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
MaintenanceRecord .......................................
7-15
7-16
Service Station Checks .....................................
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements
for details
your new vehicle warrantiesSee your GM dealer
.
.
7-1
A Word About Maintenance
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we don’t know exactly
how you’ll drive it.You may drive
very short distances only a few times a week. Ormay
youdrive long
distances all the time
in very hot, dusty weather.You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drivetoitwork, to do errands, orin many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways’pWple use their GM vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. You may even need morefrequent checks and replacements than
you will findin the schedules in this section.
So please read this section and
note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle
in good condition, see your GM dealer, the place many GM owners choose
to have their maintenance work done. Your dealer can be relied upon to use
proper parts and practices.
Your Vehicle AndThe Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps keep your vehicle
in good
working condition, butit also helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance or the
removal of important components can significantly affect the quality of the
air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or even the wrong tire inflation can
increase the levelof emissions from your vehicle.
To help protect our
environment, and to help keep your vehicle in good condition, please
maintain your vehicle properly.
If you are skilled enoughto do some work on your vehicle, you
will
probably want to getthe service information GM publishes.
You will find a
list of publications and how to get them
in Section 8, CustomerAssistance
Information. See “Service Publications” in the Index.
The Maintenance Record provides a place
for you to record the maintenance
performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this section. This will help you determine when your
next maintenance should be done. In addition,
it isa good idea to keep your
7-2
maintenance receipts. Theymay be needed to qualify your vehicle
for
warranty repairs.
Scheduled Mainfenance Services
This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when
you should schedule them. Your
GM dealer knows your vehicle best and
wants you to be happy with it. If you go to your dealer
for all your service
needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM
parts.
These schedules arefor vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within the recommended limits.
You will
find these limits on your vehicle’s Certification Label.
See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
are driven on regular road surfaces,
and within legal driving limits, as
described in Section 4, Your Driving and the Road.
are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See “Off Road
Driving With Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle” in the Index.
use the proper fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting m e Proper Maintenance Schedule
Your driving conditions and how you use your vehicle will you
help
determine which schedule to use.
The schedules are found later in this
section.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI
Is any one of these truefor your vehicle?
Most trips areless than 4 miles (6 kilometers).
Mosttripsare less than 10 miles (16 k i l c
temperatures are below freezing.
.eters)andoutside
The engine is at low speed mostof the time (as in stop-and-go traffic,
door-to-door- delivery, or other commercial uses).
0
You operate in dusty areas or off-road frequently.
You tow a trailer.
If any one (or more) of these is truefor your driving, follow Schedule.
I. The
chart for Schedule I has plus signs(+).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE11
Follow ScheduleI1 ONLY ifnone of the above conditions are true.The
chart for Schedule 11has dots ( 0 ) .
7-3
MAlNTENANCE SCHEDULEI
Rotation
Wheel and13 Tire
Service
t
Axle 14 Drive
+
t
t
t
t
+
15 BrakeSystemsInspection**
* An Emission Control Service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index
$ The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges thatall recommended
maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
TO801
7-4
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI (continued)
THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHARTUP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS.
TO802
7-5
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI/
Item
Service
No.
Miles (000)
7.5
15 22.5
37.5
12.5
50
25
Kilometers (000) 62.5
1EngineOilChange*-Every
o .
12 Months, or
Oil FilterChange*-Every
12 Months, or
2ChassisLubrication-Every
12 Months, or
ce*SystemCooling
75
.
0
o
30
60
52.5
45
37.5
.
.
.
0
.
.
.
3
.
.
0
.
.
87.5
100
0
.
.
0
0
-Every 24 Months or
*
11FuelTank,CapandLines
Inspection*$
12 Engine Accessory Drive Belt
Inspection*
otation
Wheeland Tire
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
Axle Service
O
O
.
.
.
.
.
.
15BrakeSystemsInspection**
* An Emission Control Service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index
$ The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty
or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that
all recommended
maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHARTUP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILESAT THE SAME INTERVALS.
TO803
Drive 14
Explanation Of Scheduled Maintenance Services
Below are explanations of the services listedin the maintenance charts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed
in this section. Make sure
whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and
all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
1. ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER CHANGE*-ALWAYS USE
API SERVICE SH ORSG ENERGY CONSERVING I1 OILSOF THE
PROPER VISCOSITY. The “SH” or“SG’ designation may be shown
alone or in combination with others, such “SWCD”,
as
or “SH, SG,
CD,” or“SGKD”, etc. To determine the preferred viscosity
oil for your
vehicle’s engine (e.g. SAE 5W-30), see “EngineOil” in the Index.
2. CHASSIS LUBRICATION-Lubricate the front suspension, ball
joint, steering linkage, and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake
cable guides, propshaft splines, universal
joints, brake pedal springs,
and clutch pedal springs atthe intervals specifiedon the proper
maintenance schedule, or at every
engine oil change, whichever comes
first.
Ball joints should not be lubricated unless their temperature 10°F
is
(-12°C) or higher. Whenthe weather is cold,let them warm up before
lubricating them or they could be damaged.
Also, be sureto check allthe vehicle fluid levelsat this time.
3. COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE*- Drain, flush and refillthe
system with new or approved recycled coolant conforming to “GM
Specification 6038-M” (4.3L engine)or “GM Specification 6043-M”
(2.2L engine). See “Engine Coolant”
in the Indexfor the proper coolant
and mixture to use in your vehicle.
Also inspect the hoses and replace them if they are cracked, swollen, or
deteriorated. Cleanthe outside of the radiator and air conditioning
condenser. Wash the radiator neck.
To ensure proper operation,
pressure test the radiator and cap.
4. AIR CLEANER FILTER REPLACEMENT*-Replace at
specified intervals. Ask your dealer
for the proper replacement
intervals for your driving conditions.
5. FRONT WHEEL BEARING REPACK (%WHEEL DRIVE
ONLY) - Clean and repack thefront wheel bearings at each brake
relining, or at the specified interval, whichever comes first.
*An Emission Control Service
7-7
6. TRANSMISSIONSERVICE:
Automatic Transmission- Change the transmission fluid and filter
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km) he vehicle is mainly driven under
one or moreof these conditions:
0 In heavy city traffic.
0 Where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90°F (32°C) or
higher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
Frequent trailer pulling.
Uses such as taxi, police, delivery or other commercial service.
If the vehicle is not used mainly under any
of these conditions, change
the fluid and filter every30,000 miles (50 000 km).See “Automatic
Transmission Fluid” in the Index
for more information.
Manual Transmission- Transrnission fluid does not require periodic
changing.
7. FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT*-Replace the fuelfilter at the
specified interval or sooner
if clogged.
8. SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT*$- Replace spark plugs with the
type listedin Section 6. Spark plugs (AC908)for the 2.2L Engine(VIN
Code 4) should be replaced every 100,000 miles (166
000 kilometers).
Spark plugs (.CR43TSM)for the 4.3L engines(VIN Codes W and Z)
should be replaced every 30,000 miles
(50 000 kilometers). See
‘‘Specification Charts” in the Index.
9. SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION*- Clean wires and inspect
for burns, cracks or other damage. Check the wire boot
fit at the
distributor and at the spark plugs. Replace wires as needed.
10. ENGINE TIMING CHECK AND DISTRIBUTOR CHECK*$ Adjust timing to underhood label specifications. Inspect the inside and
outside of the distributor cap and rotor
for cracks, carbon tracking and
corrosion. Clean or replace as needed.
*An Emission Control Service
$=The California Air Resources Board has detennined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or
limit recall liability prior to the completion
of vehicle usefuilife. General
Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
7-8
?A fluid loss in these systemsmay indicate a problem. Have them inspected
and repairedat once.
7-9
Owner Checksand Services
Listed below are owner checks and services which would be made at the
time period specified to help ensure proper safety, emission performance,
and dependabilityof your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairsare completed at once. Whenever any fluids
or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones,
as shown in this section.
At Least Oncea Month
Tire Inflation Pressure Check
- Check the tiresfor proper inflation.If
they are low, inflate them to the level specified on the Certification label.
See “Inflation-Tire Pressure” in the Index.
At feast Four Times a Year
Tailgate Lubrication-Lubricate tailgate latch bolt, handle assembly pivot
points, and hinges with lubricant recommended this
in section. Lubricate
every 3,000 miles (5 000 kilometers) if following Maintenance ScheduleI, or
every 7,500 &les (12 500 kilometers) if following Maintenance Schedule II.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinder Lubrication-Lubricate key lock cylinders with one
of the lubricants recammended
in this section.
Transmission Neutral or Clutch Start Switch Operation
-
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the manual parking brake, and the regular brake. See
“Brakes” and “Parking Brake”in the Index.Do not use the accelerator
pedal.
3. Be ready toturn off the engine immediatelyif it starts.
4. On automatic transmission vehicles,try to start the engine in each gear.
The starter should work only T“
in (Park) or “ N ’ (Neutral).
On manual transmission vehicles, put theshift lever in “ N ’ (Neutral),
push the clutch down halfway, andtry to start the engine. The starter
should work only when the clutch is pushed down
all the way to the floor.
7-10
Steering Column Lock Operation
-While parked, try to turn the key to
LOCK in each gear shift position.
With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only
when the gear shift isin “P’(Park).
0
With manual shift, the key should turn LOCK
to
only wnen you’re in
“ R ’ (Reverse).
On vehicles with a key release lever, try to turn theto key
LOCK without
pressing the lever. The key should turn toLOCK only with the key lever
depressed.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only
in LOCK.
Parking ‘Brake and Transmission
“ P ’ (Park) Mechanism Operation
-
Park on afairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your
foot on the regular brake,
set the manual parking brake.
0
To check the parking brake:With the engine running and the
transmission in “N” (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal.Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
0
To check the “ P ’ (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: Apply the regular
brake and shift to“P’
(Park). Release the manual parking brake, then
slowly release the regular brake.
Lap and Shoulder Belts Condition and Operation
-Inspect belt system,
including: webbjng, buckles,latch plates, retractors, guideloops and
anchors. Have a belt assembly replaced
if the webbing has been cut or
otherwise damaged.
Body Lubrication Service-Lubricate all body door hinges including the
tailgate andtailgate handle pivot points. Lubricate the body hood,
fuel door
and rear compartment hinges, latches and locks including interior glove box
and console doors, and any moving seat hardware. Lubricate the hood safety
lever pivot and prop rod pivot.
More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
7-11
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed
at
least twice a year (for instance, each spring fall).
and You should let your
GM dealer’s service departmentor other qualified service center
do these
jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed
at once.
Steering and Suspension Inspection?
-Inspect front and rear suspension
and steering systemfor damaged, loose or missing parts, signs
of wear or
lack of lubrication. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Lu‘ kate the steering linkage.
~
Accelerator Control System-Lubricate all pivot points with engine
oil,
except theTBI throttle shaft. Do not lubricate the cam pulley. Remove all
external deposits from pulley.
Do not oil any accelerator or cruise control
cables. Replace any cables that have high effort or excessive wear.
Exhaust System Inspection- Inspect the complete system. Inspect the
body near the exhaust system. Look
for broken, damaged, missingor
out-of-position parts, as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or
other conditions which could cause a heat buildup in floor
the pan or could
let exhaust fumes seep into the passenger compartments.
See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index.
Drive Axle Service- Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed.
Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
Transfer Case (four-wheel drive) Inspection? - Every 12 months or at
oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. Check vent hose at transfer case
for kinks and proper
installation. More frequent lubrication
may be required on off-road use.
?A fluid loss in these systems
may indicate a problem.Have them inspected
and repaired at once.
7- 12
Recommended Fluids & Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below
by name, part number or
specification may be obtained
from your GM Dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Clutch System
Hydraulic Brake Systems
Power Steering System
Manual Steering Gear
Automatic Transmission
Manual Iransrmssu
a. 5-Speed (2.2L Engine)
b. 5-Speed (4.3L Engine)
Differential:
a. Standard -Front and a.
1052271).
No. PartAxle
Rear
Locking
b. b.
Transfer Case
FLUIDLUBRICANT
API serviceSH or SG Energy ConservingI1
oils of the proper viscosity.The “SH” or
“SG’designation may be shown aloneor in
combination with others, such as “SH/CD”,
or “SH, SG, CD,” or “SGKD”, etc. To
determine the preferred viscosity oil
for your
vehicle’s engine (e.g. SAE 5W-30). See
“Engine Oil” inthe Index.
Mixture of water and a good quality ethylene
glycol base antifreeze conforming to
GM-6038-M (4.3L) orGM-6043-M (2.2L)
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
No.
12345347 or equivalent).
Delco Supreme11brake fluid (GM Part
No.
1052535 or DOT-3).
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No.
1050017) or equivalent conforming toGM
spec 9985010.
GM Lubricant (GM Part No. 1052182) or
equivalent.
DEXRON@-III (perferred) or
DEXRON@-IIE Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
a. DEXRON@-IIE Automatic Transmission
Fluid (GM Part No. 1051855).
b. Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM
Part No. 12345349).
SAE-8OW-90GL-5
gear lubricant (GM
SAE-SOW-90 gear
lubricant
(GM
Part
No. 1052271).
DEXRON@-IIE Automatic Transmission
Fluid (GM Part No. 1051855).
7-23
USAGE
FLULD/LUIBRICANT
ColumnShift,TransferChassislubricantmeetingrequirements
of
Case Shift Lever, Propeller NLGI Grade 2, Catagory LB or GC-LB
Shaft Slip Splinesand(GM
Part No.1052497).
Universal Joints.
Clutch Linkage. Pushrod to Chassis lubricant meeting requirements
of
NLGI Grade 2, Catagory LB
or GC-LB
clutch forkjoint.
(GM Part No. 1052497).
Hood Latch Assembly:
a, Pivots and spring anchor a. Engine oil (GM Part No. 1050109).
b. Release Pawl
b. Chassis lubricant meeting requirements
of
GM-6031-M (GM PartNo. 1052497).
Front Wheel Bearings
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLG Grade 2, Catagory
GC
or GC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344).
Chassis lubricant meeting requirements
of
Constant Velocity
Universal Joint
NLG Grade 2, Catagory LB or
GC-LB (GM
Part No. 1052497).
Automatic Transmission
Engine oil (GM Part No. 1050109).
Shift Linkage, Floor Shift
Linkage, Hood and Door
Hinges, Body Door Hinge
Pins, Folding Seat, Fuel
Door Hinge
Key Lock Cylinders
GM Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No.
12345 120)or a synthetic light weight engine
oil (SAE 5W-30).
Chassis lubricant meeting requirementsof
Chassis Lubrication
NLG Grade 2, Catagory LB orGC-LB (GM
Part No. 1052497).
Windshield Washer
GM Optikleen washer solvent (GMPart
Solvent
No. 1051515) or equivalent.
Silicone grease (GM Part
No. 1052863) or
Weatherstrip
equivalent.
Tailgate
Handle
Pivot
Multi-purpose
lubricant
meeting
Points, Hinges, Latch Bolt, requirements of GM Part No. 9985164.
and Linkage
Gas Line De-Icer (GM Part No. 10515 16).
Gas Line
Spray-A-Squeek (GM Part No. 1052277).
Weather Strips
TM
Maintenance Record
After eachof the preceding Scheduled Maintenance Services
is performed,
record the date, odometer reading, services performed (list item numbers)
and who performedthe services inthe appropriate column. In addition,
retain copiesof your receipts.It is suggested that receipts be kept with your
Owner’s Manual.
TO001
Service Station Checks
It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these
under-hood checks at each fuel fill.
@
Check the engine oil level and addif necessary.
Check the engine coolant level and add if necessary.
0
Check the windshield washerfluid level and addif necessary.
See the Index under these itemsfor information onhow to check them.
Hood Release
Lever
See Page 6-6.
Remote
Oil Filfer
See Page6-1 3.
-
I
4
Windshield
Washer Fluid
See Page 6-28.
I
'
Power Steering
Reservoir
See Page 6-26.
/
Clutch Fluid
Reservoir
See Page 6-20.
,Battery
The Delco
Freedom battery
needs no water.
See Page 6-32.
fit-
,Cooling
Sysfem
Check and add
coolant only at
the coolant
recovery tank.
See Page 6-23.
\Engine Oil
I
\see
Page 6-9m
Transmission
Fluid
Automatic:
See Page 6-15.
Manual:
See Page 6-18.
Ic
,Fuel
Capacity 20 U.S.
Gal. (7.6L). Use
unleaded gas
only, 87 octane
or higher.
See Page 6-3.
/
Brake Fluid.
Reservoir
See Page 6-29.
\Cold TiFe
Pressure
See Tire-Loading
sticker on the
inside of the
rear edgeof
the driver's door
lock pillar.
See Page 6-45.
/
Spare Tire
Pressure
See Page 6-45.
7- 17
Notes
Customer Assistance Information
Here you willfind out how to contact Chevrolet you
if need assistance. This
section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report
any safety defects.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...............................
8-2
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired (TDD) . . . . . 8-3
GM Participationin BBB AUTO LINE - Alternative Dispute Resolution
8-3
Program ................................................
Reporting Safety DefectsTo The United States Government . . . . . . . . . 8-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Reporting Safety Defects To General Motors .....................
8-5
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Reporting Safety Defects To The Canadian Government
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and Chevrolet.
Normally, any concern with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved
by your dealer's Sales or Service Departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned,
misunderstandings can occur.
If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE-Discuss your concern with
a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns can often be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matterhas already been reviewed with the Sales, Service, or Parts
Manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the General Manager.
STEP TWO -If after contactinga member of dealership management, it
appears your concern cannot be resolved
by the dealership withoutfurther
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Assistance
Center in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
In Mexico, call (525) 254-3777. In Puerto Ricoor U.S. Virgin Islands, call
1-809-763-1315. In all other overseas locations, contact
GM North
American Export Salesin Canada by calling 1-416-644-41 12. As of
October 4, 1993,call 1-905-6444112.
For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to
give the Customer Assistance Representative:
Your name, address, home and business telephone number
0
Vehicle Identification Number (Thisis available from the vehicle
registration or title, or the plate at the left oftop
the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call the tollfree number listed previously in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. However,
if you wish to write
Chevrolet, write to:
..
. .
..
.-
I
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P. 0. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet
for
addresses of Canadian and GM overseas offices.
8-2
..
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your concern will likely
be resolved in the dealership, using the dealership’s facilities, equipment
and personnel. Thatis why we suggest you followStep One first if you have
a concern.
Customer Assistancefor the Hearingor
Speech Impaired(TDD)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, Chevrolet has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication Devicesfor the Deaf) equipmentat its
Customer Assistance Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access toa TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:1-800-TDD-CHEV
(1-800-833-2438). (TDD usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
GM Participation in888 AUTO LlNE Alternative Dispute Resolution Program*
*This program may notbe available in all states, depending on state law.
Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance information
booklet. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or to discontinueits participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed to making sure
you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. Our experience has
shown if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, that the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described
earlier in this sectionis very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third-party can assistin arriving
at a solutionto a disagreement regarding vehicle repairs
or interpretation of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements Chevrolet voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO
LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better
Business Bureau system to settle disputes between customers and
automobile manufacturers. This program
is available free of charge to
customers who currently ownor lease a GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer Satisfaction Procedure,
you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number,
or write
them at the following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name and address, your
vehicle identification number(VIN), and a statement of the natureof your
complaint. Eligibility is limited
by vehicle age and mileage, and other
factors.
We prefer you utilize the customer satisfaction procedure before you resort
to AUTO LINE, but youmay contact theBBB at any time.The BBB will
attempt to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary between you
and Chevrolet. If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be
scheduled where eligible customers may present their case to an impartial
third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject.
If you
accept the decision,GM will be bound bythat decision. The entire dispute
resolution procedure should ordinarily take about forty days from the time
you file a claim until a decision
is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program before filing a claim
with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further
information, contact the BBB
at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet
Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-222-1020.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists
in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the War- npton, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other infon tion about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE
CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying
General Motorsof Canada Limited.You may write to:
Transport Canada, Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 3J2
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada) ina situation like
this, we certainly hope you’ll notifyus. Please call us at1-800-222-1020 ,
or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P. 0. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777
(French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Chevrolet Rc rdside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer satisfaction,
Chevrolet is excited to provide the services
of the ChevroletIGeo Roadside
Assistance Center.
.; L
. I
--
q-Hour Roadside AssistanceNumber
Koadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling
1-800-CHEV USA (1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.
If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisors have access
to a nationwide network
of dealer recommended service providers.The
following services are available:
0
Towing
0
Locksmith
Tire repair
0
Rental car or taxi
Additional services as necessary
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with
quality and priority service. When roadside services are required, our
advisors will explain any payment obligations that may
be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the following available to
give to the advisor:
0
Vehicle Identification Number
License plate number
0
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance
program accessiblefrom anywhere in Canada or the U.S.A. Please refer to
the separate brochure provided
by the dealeror call 1-800-268-6800 for
emergency services.
I
8-6
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers needing
warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in
conjunction withthe coverage provided by the BUMPER
TO
BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty retail
to purchasers of 1994
Chevrolet/Geo passenger car and light duty trucks.
In Canada,please consult yourGM Dealer for information on
courtesy transportation.
COURTESY TRANSPORTATION INCLUDES:
One way SHUTTLE RIDE for any warranty repair.
Up to $30 maximum daily VEHICLE RENTAL allowancefor any
5 days.
overnight warranty repair up to
Up to $30 maximum daily CAB,BUS, or OTHER transportation
allowance in lieu of rental for any overnight warrantyrepair up to5
days.
Up to $10 daily FUEL allowancefor rides provided by another person
(i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.)
in lieu of rentalfor any overnight warranty
repair up to5 days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportati---~
arrang
Its will beadministered
by your ChevroletIGeo dealershlp service management. Claim amounts
should reflect all actual costs.
Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation Programis not part of the
BUMPER TO BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make any changes
or discontinue
the Courtesy Transportation Program at any time without notification.
For additional program details, contact your Chevrolet/Geo dealer.
Service Publications
Information on how to obtain Product Service Publications (PSP's) and
Indexes as described belowis applicable only in the fifty U.S. states (and
the Districtof Columbia) and onlyfor cars and light trucks with GVWR less
than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg).
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins and Indexes
can be obtainedby writing to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Service Publications Department
1908 Colonel Sam Dr.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Chevrolet regularly sends its dealers useful service bulletins about
Chevrolet products. Chevrolet monitors product performance
in the field.
We then prepare bulletinsfor servicing our products better. Now,you can
get these bulletins too.
8-7
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the proper use and of
care
your vehicle. Some describe costly repairs, Others describe inexpensive
repairs which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid future costly
repairs. Some bulletinstell a technician how to repair a new or unexpected
condition. Others describea quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help
a technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small number
of cars or
trucks. Your Chevrolet dealer or a qualified technician may have to
determine if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.
You can subscribe to all Chevrolet’s bulletinsby calling Helm, Inc. at
1-800-782-4356. This way you’llget them as they become available.
mdividual PSP’s
li you
don’t want to buy all the PSP’s issued by Chevrolet
for aucar67
truck modelsin the model year, you can buy individual PSP’s, such as those
which may pertain to a particular model.
To do this,you will first need to
see our indexof PSP’s. It provides a varietyof information. Here’s what
you’ll find in the index and how
you can get one:
What You’ll Find in the Index:
A list of PSP’s published by Chevrolet in a model
year (1990 orlater).
PSP’s covering all modelsof Chevrolet cars or light trucks (less than
10,000 pounds(4 536 kg) GVWR) are listed in the same index.
Ordering information so you can buy the specific PSP’s you may want.
Price information for the PSP’s you may want to buy.
How You Can Get an Index:
Indexes are published periodically. Mostof the PSP’s which could
potentially apply to the most recent Chevrolet models will be listed
in the
most recent publicationfor that model year. This means you may want to
wait until the end
of the model year before ordering
an index, if you are
interested in buying PSP’s pertaining
to a current model year car or truck.
Some PSP’s pertaining to a particular model year vehicle may be published
in later years, and these would be listed
in the later year’s index. When
you
order an indexfor a model year that is not over yet, we’ll send you the most
recently published~issue.Check the ordering formfor indexes for earlier
model years.
Cut out the ordering form,
fill it out, and mail itin. We will then see to it
that an indexis mailed to you. Thereis no charge for indexes for the
1989-1994 model years.
1
8-8-
!
Toll-Free Telephone Number
If you want an additional ordering form
for an index,just call toll-free and
we’ll be happy to send you one. Automated recording equipment will take
your name and mailing address.The number to call is 1-800-55 1-4123.
Copies at Participating Dealers
Copies of Indexes andindividual PSP’s are at your participating Chevrolet
dealer. You can ask tosee them.
A VERY IMPORTANT REMINDER: ThesePSP’s are meant for
technicians. Theyare not meant for the “do-it-yourselfer.” Technicians
have the equipment, tools, safetyinstructions, and know-how to do ajob
quickly and safely.
Chevrolet reserves the right
to change these procedures without notice.
Chevrolet Service Publications
You can get these Product Service Publications by using the order form. You
can also get Service Manuals and Owner Publications.
8-9
!,
'!
8-10
I
n
Index
A
Accessory rower Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
3-4.6-42
Airconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fanswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 4
3-5
Functionhob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerantcapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-78
3-5
TemperatureKnob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
Antenna. FixedMast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-lock Brakes (See “Brakes”)
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
6-67
Materials Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
AMRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc (CD) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
AM-FM Stereo Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck and Equalizer. . . . . . . . 3-13
3-20
Anti-Theft System (CD) System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cassette Tape Player Care .......................................
3-16
CompactDiscCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
2-16
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Axle
6-22
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RearLocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belts (See “Safety Belts”)
Better Business Bureau Mediation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-lockWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-wheel Anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-WheelAnti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leakcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mastercylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RearDrumBrakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacingparts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.59.
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
8-3
4-35
4-5
4-6
2-60
6-30
4-7
4-7
6-28
6-29
2-16
4-7
4-7
6-32
4-5
444
4-6
Brakes (continued)
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InEmergencies ................................................
............................................
Break.In.NewVehicle
BulbReplacement ...............................................
ReplacementChart ............................................
4-5
4-8
2-9
6-33
6-78
C
Capacities and Specification Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-73
CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.225.2,6
)
Cassette Tape Player (see “Audio Systems”
CatalyticConverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
Certif“lcation/TireLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
Changing a Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.20.
Chemical Paint Spotting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67
Child Restraints (See “Safety Belts”)
2-67
CHMSLFeedWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CigaretteLightedAshtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
Circuit Breakers (See “Fuses”)
Cleaning
6-65
Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64
Inside of Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-60
Instrument Panel. Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
Outside of Vehicle .............................................
6-64
6-62. 6-66
Special Problems .........................................
Vinyl or Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-65
6-64
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
AMRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc (CD) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
AM-FM Stereo Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck and Equalizer
. . . . . . . . 3-13
3-2
ComfortControls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion to Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Coolant (See “Engine”)
6-73
Cooling System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-74
CrankcaseCapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
2-42
Increasespeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
OnHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducespeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
2-41
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2-44
ToGetOutOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) .........................
2 4 7 . 2-64
IndicatorLight .....................................
2-47.2-62. 2-64
DomeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Driving
Across an Incline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
After Off-Road Driving ........................................
4-25
4-25
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backingup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-42
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-31
HighwayHypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
InBlizzard ...................................................
4-33
InCity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
In Mud. Sand. Snow. Or Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23.5-35
InRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
InWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
LossofControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
4-13
Off-Roading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
OnGrades ...................................................
4-43
On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
4-17
OnOff-Road Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnSnoworIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Stuck in Deep Snow ...........................................
5-35
Throughwater ..........................................
2-14.4-24
Uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-38
WithaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
E
Electrical System
AccessoryPowerOutlets .......................................
2-51
6-70
Add-onEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine
5-15,6-25
Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
2.14.3-5.6.13
Coolant (Block) Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.263.73
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-60
6-74
Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
5-19
FanNoise ...................................................
6-69,6-73
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (See “Oil”)
3
Engine (continued)
Overheating ..................................................
5-12
Runningwhileparked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
2-12
Starting .....................................................
Equipment,Add-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47
Exhaustsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
F
4
Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
FuelGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2-56, 2-57
Odometer ..............................................
2-62
Oil Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer ................................ . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Gages (continued)
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-57
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
H
I
If You’re Stuck in Sand. Mud. Ice. or Snow ...........................
Ignitionswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation-Tire Pressure ............................................
Jackstorage ...............................................
JumpStarting ................................................
5-35
2-10
6-52
5-21, 5-29
5-3’5-4
K
Key Release Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys ...........................................................
5
.
2-11
2-3
L
Labels
6-45. 6.52
CertificatiodI‘ire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Truck-Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Brake System Warning ....................................
2.59.4-16
6.33.6-74
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
2-63
CheckGagesLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
FogLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-46
Front ParkingEurn Signal .......................................
6-36
Headlights (See “Headlights”)
2.62.65
InQcator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator .....................................
2.61. 6-44
2-35
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServiceEngineSoon ...........................................
6-44
6-37,6-74
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReplacementChart ............................................
6-74
LoadingInformation ...................................
4-14,645, 6-48
4-14,6-38
Loading Your Vehicle .......................................
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
Accelerator Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
6-39
Front Suspension and Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Wheel Bearings (Two-Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
TailgateHandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
6-34
HoodLatchesandHinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LockCylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
Propeller Shaft SlipSplinesNniversal Joints ........................
6-43
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
7-13
RecommendedLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TransferCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
M
Maintenance
OtherItems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeriodicInspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ScheduledMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WhenTowingaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder (See “Brakes”)
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convexoutside ...............................................
Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
6-39
7-12
7-16
7-3
6-67
4-38
2-48
2-50
2-48
2-49
2-50...
111
0
Odometer ...................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.526.5.7
Off-Road Driving (See “Driving”)
Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DisposalofUsed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PressureGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ToCheck .....................................................
WhatKindtoUse .............................................
WhentoAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services ........................................
Parking
OnHills ....................................................
Over Things That Burn .........................................
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) ............................
Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.212,.28
Passing Other Vehicles ............................................
PayloadCapacity ................................................
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering ......................................................
SteeringFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Service Publications ........................................
4-10
6-9
6-13
6-13
2-62
6-9
6-10
6-9
6-13
7-10
4-43
2-24
2-24
2-24
4-11
6-47
7-12
2-7
4-8
6-26
4-45
8-7
R
Pressure
Radiator
......
6-25
Radio (see “Audio Systems”)
7-13
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35
RecoveryHooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReplacementParts ...............................................
6-73
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Roadside Assistance ...............................................
8-5
Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Safety Belts
Cleaning ....................................................
6-63
Checking Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1-25
ChildRestraints ...............................................
1-23
Children ....................................................
Small Children and Babies ......................................
1-23
1-33
Extender ....................................................
1-20
Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Lapshoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
242-8
Theft .......................................................
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
2-33
TjiltWheel ......................................................
Tires ..........................................................
6-51
Balancing ......................................................
6-57
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20, 5-26
Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20
V
Vehicle
Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Identification Number ..........................................
6-69
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . .6-32
.
Symbols ..............................................
vn. ~111.IX. x
VentilationSystem ................................................
3-2
AirVents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Voltmeter ......................................................
2-67
9
W
10
Notes
.
Notes
.C - 9408
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
GM
-
Download PDF
Similar pages